2013 Trax Manual

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet TRAX Owner Manual - 2013 - CRC - 3/6/13

2013 Chevrolet TRAX Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-27

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28Downloadable Applications . . . 7-47

Bluetooth Phone/Devices . . . . . 7-52Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-23Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-26Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-30Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-36Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-44


2013 Chevrolet TRAX Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, andTRAX are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 22789121 A First Printing ©2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

P : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Passenger Sensing System(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-15Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-18Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-19Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-19Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-20Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8‑4.

2. Turn and Lane-Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2.

3. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.

4. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑4.

5. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 6‑3.

6. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1.

USB Port and Auxiliary InputJack (Inside Instrument PanelStorage). See Auxiliary Deviceson page 7‑24

7. Infotainment on page 7‑2.

8. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1 (If Equipped).

9. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

10. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

11. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑13.

12. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1.

13. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

14. Horn on page 5‑2.

15. Ignition Positions onpage 9‑14.

16. Traction Control System (TCS)/StabilitTrak Button. SeeTraction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑30/StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑31.

17. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.

18. Safety Locks on page 2‑8.

19. Parking Brake on page 9‑29.

20. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑23 orManual Transmission onpage 9‑26.

21. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4.

22. Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light. See SafetyBelt Reminders on page 5‑11.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter may work up to 30 m(98 ft) away from the vehicle.

Press the key release button toextend the key blade. The key canbe used for the ignition and alllocks.

K : Press to unlock the driver door,all doors or, if equipped, a lockingfuel door.

Q : Press to lock all doors or, ifequipped, a locking fuel door.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑27.

7 : For vehicle with this feature,press and hold briefly to initiatevehicle locator. Press and hold for atleast three seconds to sound thepanic alarm. Press again to cancelthe panic alarm.

See Keys on page 2‑1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartFor vehicles with this feature, theengine can be started from outsidethe vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash.


In Brief 1-5

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock a door manually:. From the inside, to lock the door,

use the lock knob on the top ofthe door panel.

. From the outside, turn the keytoward the front or rear of thevehicle, or press K or Q on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Power Door Locks

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.

LiftgateTo lock or unlock the liftgate,press Q or K on the door lockswitch or Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

To open the liftgate, press K on theRKE transmitter, then use thetouch pad.


1-6 In Brief

See Liftgate on page 2‑8.

Windows

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull up on the front edge ofthe switch to raise it. See PowerWindows on page 2‑14.

The switches work when thevehicle is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑18.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Height Adjustment

If available, move the lever up ordown to manually raise or lowerthe seat.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.


In Brief 1-7

Power Seats

To adjust the power driver seat,if available:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Seat Shown, Power SeatSimilar

If available, press the front or rear ofthe switch to increase or decreaselumbar support. Release the switchwhen the desired level of support isreached.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑5.

Reclining Seatbacks


To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

If necessary, move the safetybelt out of the way to access thelever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.


1-8 In Brief

To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5.

Second Row SeatsThe rear seatbacks can be foldeddown to increase cargo space.

See Rear Seats on page 3‑9.

Heated Seats

If available, the controls are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the engine must be running.

Press L or M to heat the driver orpassenger seat.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑7.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3‑2and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.


In Brief 1-9

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3‑13.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑14.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑15.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑45.

Passenger SensingSystem (Canada)

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions.No other airbag is affected bythe passenger sensing system.See Passenger Sensing System(Canada) on page 3‑32 forimportant information.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator (Canada) onpage 5‑12.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Turn the selector switch toL (Left) or R (Right) to choosethe driver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjust themirror.

3. Turn the selector switch to9 todeselect the mirror.


1-10 In Brief

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

For vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind. SeeManual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑13.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

For vehicles with an automaticdimming rearview mirror. The mirrorwill automatically reduce the glarefrom the headlamps from behind.The dimming feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑13.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up,down, forward, and backward.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are in theheadliner above the rear seats.

9 : Press to turn the lamps off,even when a door is open.

H : When the button is returned tothe middle position, the lamps turnon automatically when a door isopened.

R : Press to turn on the dome lamps.


In Brief 1-11

Reading Lamps

For vehicles with front readinglamps, they are in the overheadconsole.

# or$ : Press to turn each lampon or off.

For more information about interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control on page 6‑5 orCourtesy Lamps on page 6‑5.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is to theleft of the steering column on theinstrument panel.

There are four positions:

O : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic lamp control offor on again.

AUTO: Turns the headlamps onautomatically at normal brightness,together with the parking lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrumentpanel lights.

; : Turns on the parking lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrumentpanel lights.

5 : Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, sidemarker lamps, andinstrument panel lights. A warningchime sounds if the driver door isopened when the ignition switch isoff and the headlamps are on.

# : For vehicles with fog lamps,press to turn the lamps on or off.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2. Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4


1-12 In Brief

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column.

Move the lever to one of thefollowing positions:

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT: Move the lever up to INT forintermittent wipes, then turnthex INT band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, briefly movethe wiper lever down. For severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

b : Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3 andRear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5‑4.

Climate ControlsFor vehicles with these climatecontrol systems, the heating,cooling, and ventilation can becontrolled for the vehicle.

Climate Control System withHeater and Air Conditioning

1. Temperature Control

2. Fan Control

3. Air Delivery Mode Control

4. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats

5. Air Conditioning

6. Rear Window Defogger

7. Recirculation


In Brief 1-13

Climate Control System withHeater Only


2. Fan Control



See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.

Transmission

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

DSC allows you to shift anautomatic transmission similar to amanual transmission. To use theDSC feature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward toM (Manual).

2. Press the + (plus) end of thebutton on the side of the shiftlever to upshift, or push the− (minus) end of the button todownshift.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑25.

Manual Transmission

To engage reverse, with the vehiclestationary, pull up on the button onthe selector lever and engage thegear. If the gear does not engage,set the lever in neutral, release theclutch pedal and apply it again; thenrepeat gear selection.


1-14 In Brief

See Manual Transmission onpage 9‑26.

Up-Shift Light

If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, it may have anup-shift light that indicates when toshift to the next higher gear for thebest fuel economy.

See Manual Transmission onpage 9‑26.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio Controls WithoutTouchscreen

O VOL: Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

RADIO BAND: Press to select AM,FM, or SiriusXM® (if equipped).

© or ¨ (Seek): Press to seek theprevious or next station.

Buttons 1−6: Press to save andselect favorite stations.

INFO: Press to view current radioinformation.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7‑8.

Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page and thenumber of available favorite pagescan be set.

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingbutton 1−6 until a beep is heard.

For more information, see “Storing aStation as a Favorite” in AM-FMRadio on page 7‑11.

Radio Controls WithTouchscreen

Audio Source Menu

z VOLy (Volume): Press toincrease or decrease the volume.

O (Power): Press and hold to turnthe system on and off.

D (Home Page): Press to enterthe Home Page.


In Brief 1-15

Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to five stations can be stored ineach of the seven favorites pages.

Storing Stations


1. Select the desired station.

2. Press S or T to select thedesired page of saved favorites.

3. Hold down any of the presetbuttons to save the current radiostation to that button of theselected favorites page.

To change a preset button, tune tothe new desired radio station andhold the button.

See “Storing a Favorite Station”under AM-FM Radio on page 7‑11.

Setting the Clock

See Clock on page 5‑5.

Satellite RadioVehicles with a SiriusXM® satelliteradio tuner and a valid SiriusXMsatellite radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming and

commercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

Refer to:. www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑15.

Portable Audio DevicesSome vehicles have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and aUSB port in the storage area to theright of the infotainment system.A second AUX input is on thefront of the infotainment system,if equipped. External devices suchas iPods®, laptop computers, MP3players, CD changers, and USBstorage devices may be connected,depending on the audio system.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑24.


1-16 In Brief

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone to make and receivehands-free calls using the vehicleaudio system and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone must be paired with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system before itcan be used in the vehicle. Not allphones will support all functions.

See Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7‑28 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑30 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑39 andHands-Free Phone on page 7‑45.

Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio steering wheel controlscould differ depending on thevehicle's options. Some audiosteering wheel controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.

b / g : Press to interact with theavailable Bluetooth or OnStarsystems.

$ /i : Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

Press to silence the vehiclespeakers while using theinfotainment system. Press again toturn the sound on.

For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ : Press to select an audiosource.

Toggle up or down to select the nextor previous favorite radio station orCD/MP3 track.

+ x −: Press + or − to increase ordecrease the volume.

See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.


In Brief 1-17

Cruise Control

5 : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off.

RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up toresume a previously set speed or toaccelerate.

SET/−: Move the thumbwheel downto set a speed or to make thevehicle decelerate.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑34.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems. The controls forthe DIC are on the turn signal lever.

1. SET/CLR: Press to set or clearthe menu item displayed.

2. wx : Use the thumbwheel toscroll through the items ineach menu.

3. MENU: Press to display the DICmenus. This button is also usedto return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑24.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If available, the RVC displays a viewof the area behind the vehicle whenthe vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse). The display will appearon the radio screen.

To clean the camera lens above thelicense plate, rinse it with water andwipe it with a soft cloth.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9‑37.


1-18 In Brief

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, this system usessensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audiblebeeps to provide distance andsystem information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑36.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has an accessorypower outlet located in front of thecupholders on the center stack.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.

Sunroof

On vehicles with this feature, thesunroof only operates when theignition is turned to ON/RUN orRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive.

Open/Close: Press and hold thefront or rear of switch (1) to open orclose the sunroof.

Vent: Press and hold the front orrear of switch (2) to vent or closethe sunroof.

Manually close the sunshade.

The sunroof will not operate if thevehicle has an electrical failure.

See Sunroof on page 2‑16.


In Brief 1-19

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system is on whenthe vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release g on the center

stack. i illuminates in theinstrument cluster.

. Press and release g again toturn traction control back on.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑30.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem is on when the vehicle isstarted.. To turn off both Traction

Control and StabiliTrak, pressand hold g until g andi illuminate in the instrumentcluster.

. Press g again to turn on bothsystems.

StabiliTrak will automatically turnback on when the vehicle speedexceeds 50 km/h (31 mph).

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑31.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.


1-20 In Brief

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑49.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the Code 82 DICmessage when it is necessary tochange the engine oil and filter.

Remember, the oil life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the oil life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Press the MENU button to showRemaining Oil Life on thedisplay. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaininguseful life. If 99% is displayed,that means that 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

2. To reset the engine oil lifesystem, press the SET/CLRbutton while the oil life display isactive. After a few seconds,there will be a single chime andthe oil life will be reset to 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil is changed.It cannot be reset accurately.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.


In Brief 1-21

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramCanada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program(Canada) on page 13‑5 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑7.

Roadside Assistance andOnStar (Canada)

If the vehicle has an active OnStarsubscription, contact OnStar and thevehicle’s current GPS location willbe sent to an OnStar advisor toassess the situation, contactRoadside Assistance, and relay theexact location to send help.

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.


1-22 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 2-9Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-10

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-13Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for the ignition and alllocks.

Press the key release button on theRKE transmitter to extend the keyblade. Press the button and the keyblade to retract the key.

The key code is stamped on the keynumber plate and can be used tomake new keys at any dealer. Storethis information in a safe placeoutside the vehicle.

If it becomes difficult to turn the keyin the ignition, inspect the key bladefor debris. Periodically clean with abrush or pick.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program(Canada) on page 13‑5 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑7.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement(Canada) on page 13‑18 forinformation regarding Part 15 ofthe Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules andIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe RKE transmitter may work up to30 m (98 ft) away from the vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2‑3.

The following may be available:

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doorsor, if equipped, a locking fuel door.

The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking. See “LockingFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑27.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed and Unlocked Door AntiLock Out is enabled through vehiclepersonalization, all doors will lockand then the driver door will unlock.See “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑27.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2‑9.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door, all doors or, if equipped,a locking fuel door. See “DoorUnlock Options” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑27.



The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate unlocking. See “UnlockFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑27.

Pressing K will disarm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2‑9.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): For vehicles with thisfeature, press and hold briefly toinitiate vehicle locator. The exteriorlamps flash and the horn chirpsthree times.

Press and hold 7 for at leastthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signals flash for 30 seconds,or until 7 is pressed again or thekey is placed in the ignition andturned to ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press Qand then press and hold/ to startthe engine from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2‑5.

The buttons on the keys aredisabled when there is a key inthe ignition.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters will no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed.

Battery Replacement

The battery is not rechargeable.To replace the battery:

1. Extend the key blade and openthe battery cover on the back ofthe transmitter by prying with afinger.

2. Remove the used battery bypushing on the battery andsliding it toward the key blade.



3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

4. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThe vehicle may have this featurethat allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):This button will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start. The rear defog maycome on during remote start basedon cold ambient conditions. Therear fog indicator light does notcome on during remote start. If thevehicle has heated seats, they maycome on during a remote start. SeeHeated Front Seats on page 3‑7.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view. Checklocal regulations for anyrequirements.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2‑3.

Starting the Vehicle

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash. The turnsignal lamps flashing confirmsthe request to remote start thevehicle has been received.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Start the vehicle before driving.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1–3 while the engine is stillrunning. The remote start can beextended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.

For example, if the engine has beenrunning for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.



A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition (key

access) or if the key is in thevehicle (keyless access).

. The hood is not closed.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. The malfunction indicator lampis on.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts, or asingle remote start with anextension, have alreadybeen used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock a door manually:. From the inside, to lock the door,

use the lock knob on the top ofthe door panel.

. From the outside, turn the keytoward the front or rear of thevehicle, or press K or Q on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Power Door Locks

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

Automatic Door Locks

Automatic Door Lock

When the doors are closed, theignition is on, and the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park) for automatictransmissions, or when vehiclespeed becomes faster than 13km/h(8mph) for manual transmissions,the doors will lock.

The automatic door lock featurecannot be disabled.

Automatic Door Unlock

When the shift lever is moved intoP (Park) for automatic transmissionvehicles or when the ignition isturned off for manual transmissionvehicles, the doors will automaticallyunlock.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑27.



Safety Locks

The rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Press { to activate the rear doorsafety locks. The indicator light inthe switch will illuminate.

Press { again to deactivate thesafety locks.

If an inside rear door handle ispulled when the safety lock isactivated, that door will remainlocked and the indicator light mayflash. Release the handle, thendeactivate the safety locks to allowthe door to open from the inside.

Doors

Liftgate

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑22.

To lock or unlock the liftgate,press Q or K on the door lockswitch or Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

To open the liftgate from outside ofthe vehicle, press K on theRKE transmitter, then use thetouch pad.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

When closing the liftgate, close fromthe center to ensure that it fullylatches.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemFor vehicles with an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, shows the status ofthe system.



Arming the System

1. Close all doors, the hood, andthe liftgate.

2. Lock the vehicle using thetransmitter or the power doorlock button with the door open.The indicator light on theinstrument panel should comeon and flash for about30 seconds.

3. After 30 seconds, or if the Qbutton on the transmitter ispressed twice, the alarm systemwill arm, and the indicator lightwill begin to slowly flash to showthat the alarm is operating.

If any door, or the hood is openedwithout first unlocking with thetransmitter, the turn signals will flashand the horn will sound for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

The theft-deterrent alarm system willnot activate if the doors are lockedwith the key.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system, either unlockthe doors using the transmitter,or start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle with the

transmitter after all occupantshave left the vehicle and alldoors are closed.

. Always unlock a door with thetransmitter. Unlocking the driverdoor with the backup key will notdisarm the alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident,turn off the alarm by pressing K thetransmitter, or start the vehicle witha recognized transmitter in thevehicle. The alarm will not stop ifyou unlock the driver door withthe key.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the horn chirpsthree times, an attempted break-inhas occurred while the system wasarmed.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement(Canada) on page 13‑18 forinformation regarding Part 15 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules andIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.



The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarmsthe system. Only an authorized keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key. If the enginedoes not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may bedamaged. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Turn the selector switch toL (Left) or R (Right) to choosethe driver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjust themirror.

3. Turn the selector switch to9 todeselect the mirror.

For vehicles with folding mirrors andheated mirrors. See Folding Mirrorson page 2‑12 or Folding Mirrors onpage 2‑12 and Heated Mirrors onpage 2‑12.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

For vehicles with manual foldingmirrors, these mirrors can be foldedinward to prevent damage whengoing through an automatic carwash. To fold, pull the mirror towardthe vehicle. Push the mirror outwardto return it to the original position.

Folding Mirrors

Power Folding Mirrors

The vehicle may have power foldingmirrors.

To fold the mirrors:

1. Turn the selector switch to9.

2. Pull the selector switch back tofold the mirrors.

3. Pull the selector switch backagain to return the mirrors totheir original position.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.



Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

For vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind.

Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation about OnStar and howto subscribe to it. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorTo adjust the inside rearview mirror,hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

For vehicles with an automaticdimming rearview mirror, the mirrorwill automatically reduce the glarefrom the headlamps from behind.The dimming feature and theindicator light come on when thevehicle is started.

Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation about OnStar and howto subscribe to it. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.



The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows.See Keys on page 2‑1.

The driver door also has switchesthat control the passenger and rearwindows. The switches work whenthe vehicle is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑18.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull up on the front edge ofthe switch to raise it.

Express-Up/Express-DownWindows

If equipped, a window with theexpress-up/down feature can beraised or lowered without holdingthe switch. Press or pull the windowswitch fully and release it to activatethe express feature. The expressmode can be canceled by pressingor pulling the switch.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected,or replaced, windows with theexpress-up feature need to bereprogrammed for this feature towork. To program the window:

1. Close all doors with theignition in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RAP isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑18.

2. Press and continue to hold thewindow switch until the windowis fully open.



3. Pull up and hold the windowswitch to close the window.Continue to hold it briefly afterthe window is fully closed.

4. Repeat for each window that hasthe express-up feature.

Anti-Pinch Feature

The anti-pinch feature is onwindows with the express-upfeature. If an object is in the way ofthe window as it is express-closing,or in certain weather conditions likesevere icing, the window will stopand open to a factory presetposition. The window functionsnormally once the obstruction isremoved.

Rear Window Lockout

The rear window lockout featureprevents the rear passengerwindows from operating, exceptfrom the driver position.

Pressv to activate the rearwindow lockout switch. Theindicator light comes on whenactivated.

Pressv again to deactivate thelockout switch.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.



Roof

Sunroof

On vehicles with this feature, thesunroof only operates when theignition is turned to ON/RUN orRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive.

Open/Close: Press and hold thefront or rear of switch (1) to open orclose the sunroof.

Vent: Press and hold the front orrear of switch (2) to vent or closethe sunroof.

Manually close the sunshade.

The sunroof will not operate if thevehicle has an electrical failure. Dirt and debris may collect on the

sunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-20Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-20Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Airbag SystemAirbag System (Canada) . . . . . 3-22Airbag System (Mexico) . . . . . 3-24Where Are the Airbags?(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Where Are the Airbags?(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Passenger Sensing System(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-36

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-37Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-42Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-44Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-53


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Front Seats

The front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechances of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.



Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top ofthe seatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

Rear outboard head restraints arenot designed to be removed.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

Seat Position

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.



To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Height Adjustment

If available, move the lever up ordown to manually raise or lowerthe seat.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust the power driver seat,if available:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.



To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3‑5.

Lumbar Adjustment


If available, press the front or rear ofthe switch to increase or decreaselumbar support. Release the switchwhen the desired level of support isreached.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.


To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.


2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.




To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Front Seat Armrest

There may be an armrest on theinboard side of the driver seat. Toraise or lower the armrest, push upor pull down on the armrest.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

If available, the controls are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the engine must be running.

Press M or L to turn the driver orpassenger heated seat on or off.The indicator light on the controlturns on when this feature is on.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.



Remote Start Heated Seats

If available, the heated seats can beturned on automatically during aremote start when it is cold outside.The heated seats will be canceledwhen the ignition is turned on. Pressthe control to use the heated seatsafter the vehicle is started.

The heated seat indicator lights donot turn on during a remote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated seats will not turn onduring a remote start unless theheated seat feature is enabled inthe vehicle personalization menu.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 and VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑27.

Folding SeatbackThe front passenger seatback mayfold flat.

{ WARNING

If you fold the seatback forward tocarry longer objects, such as skis,be sure any such cargo is notnear an airbag. In a crash, aninflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. Thiscould cause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? (Canada)on page 3‑26 or Where Are theAirbags? (Mexico) on page 3‑27and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

{ WARNING

Things you put on this seatbackcan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.Remove or secure all itemsbefore driving.

To fold the seatback:

1. Lower the head restraint all theway. See Head Restraints onpage 3‑2.

2. Move the seat as far back aspossible. See Seat Adjustmenton page 3‑3.



3. Lift the lever fully and fold theseatback forward.


4. Continue lowering the seatbackuntil it is completely folded andlocks in place.

To raise the seatback:

1. Lift the lever fully to unlock theseatback. Then, raise theseatback and push it rearwarduntil it re-engages.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

{ WARNING


Rear SeatsFolding the Seatback

Either side of the seatback can befolded down for more cargo space.Fold a seatback only when thevehicle is not moving.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

Notice: Folding the rear seatbackprior to tilting the seat cushionforward may damage the rearseat. Always tilt the rear seatcushion forward before foldingthe seatback.

To fold a seatback down:

1. Make sure the floor area in frontof the rear seats is clear.

2. Fully lower the head restraint.See Head Restraints onpage 3‑2.



3. Slide the front seats forward andplace the front seatbacks in theupright position. See SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3 andReclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5.

4. Pull the strap on the front edgeof the rear seat cushion torelease the cushion. Tilt the seatcushion forward toward the frontof the vehicle.

The seat cushion must be tiltedforward before the seatback isfolded down. Otherwise, theseatback will not fold downproperly.

Rear Seat with Retainer Hookon the Seatback

5. Make sure the safety belt is inthe retainer hook on top of theseatback, if equipped.

Rear Seat with Retainer Hookon the Seatback

6. Reach under the belt and pullthe lever on top of the seatbackto unlock the seatback.

A tab near the seatback leverraises when the seatback isunlocked.



7. Fold the seatback forwardand down.

Safety Belt Clip on Side Trim

8. Place the outboard safety belt inthe safety belt clip (if equipped)on the side trim of the vehicle.

9. Repeat Steps 1–8 for the otherseatback and seat cushion,if desired.

Raising the Seatback

{ WARNING


{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.



To return the rear seatback to thenormal seating position:

Safety Belt Clip on Side Trim

1. Remove the outboard safety beltfrom the safety belt clip(if equipped) on the side trimof the vehicle.

2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward to lock it in place. A tabnear the seatback lever retractswhen the seatback is locked inplace.

Make sure the safety belts arenot pinched by the seatbacklocking mechanism.

The center rear safety belt maylock when you raise theseatback. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the way andstart again.

3. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it is lockedinto position.

4. Return the seat cushion to itsoriginal position and push downon the front part of the seatcushion until it latches.

Make sure the safety belts andsafety belt buckles are nottrapped under the seat cushion.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for the otherseatback and seat cushion,if necessary.

If additional cargo space is notneeded, the seatbacks should bekept in the upright, locked position.

Rear Seat Armrest

If available, the rear seat has anarmrest in the center of theseatback. Lower the armrest toaccess the cupholders.

To fold, lift the armrest up and pushit rearward until it is flush with theseatback.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle.In addition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑11.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongest



bones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑38 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑40.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.



. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

The rear center safety belt canonly be withdrawn from theretractor if the seatback is in theupright locked position.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

4. Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑20.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

6. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pull thestitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.



Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderbut not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to but notcontacting the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑14.

To move the shoulder belt heightadjuster down, push down on therelease button and move the heightadjuster to the desired position. Youcan move the height adjuster up bypushing up on the shoulder beltguide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, for vehicleswith side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten thesafety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3‑21.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

Rear safety belt comfort guides mayprovide added safety belt comfortfor older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

Safety belt comfort guides areavailable through your dealer.

To install the adjustable comfortguide to the seatback and thesafety belt:

1. Locate the anchorage loop onthe rear outboard seatback, nearthe top.

2. Attach the adjustable comfortguide to the anchor loop bythreading the hook throughthe loop.

3. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



4. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

5. The elastic cord on the comfortguide is adjustable. You canmake it longer or shorter bysqueezing both ends of theplastic adjuster and pulling onthe elastic cord or the guide.

6. Adjust the guide so the shoulderportion of the belt is on theshoulder and not falling off of it.The belt should be close to, butnot contacting, the neck.Improper comfort guideadjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt ina crash.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

7. Buckle and position the safetybelt as described previously inthis section. Make sure that theshoulder belt crosses theshoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide.Un-hook the guide from the loop onthe seat. Store the guide in aconvenient place like the glove boxfor the next time it is needed.



Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑11.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑21.



Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑12.



Airbag System

Airbag System (Canada)The vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A knee airbag for the driver.. A knee airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. Seat-mounted side impactairbags for the second rowoutboard passengers.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the lower part of theinstrument panel.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑28.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keep

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

you in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑38 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑40.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions.



The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑12.

Airbag System (Mexico)The vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑28.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑38 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑40.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑12.



Where Are the Airbags?(Canada)

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column. The front outboardpassenger knee airbag is below theglove box.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.



Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

The second row seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the sides ofthe rear seatback closest tothe door.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

Where Are the Airbags?(Mexico)

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.




If the vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags for the driver andfront outboard passenger, they arein the side of the seatbacks closestto the door.

If the vehicle has roof-rail airbagsfor the driver, right front passenger,and second row outboardpassengers, they are in the ceilingabove the side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.



Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.

Frontal knee airbags, if equipped,are designed to inflate in moderateto severe frontal or near frontalimpacts that exceed apredetermined deploymentthreshold.

The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a more

severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags for the driver andfront passenger. The vehicle mayhave seat-mounted side impactairbags for the second row outboardpassengers. The vehicle hasroof-rail airbags. See Airbag System(Canada) on page 3‑22 or AirbagSystem (Mexico) on page 3‑24.Seat-mounted side impact airbags,if equipped, and roof-rail airbags areintended to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes depending onthe location of the impact. Inaddition, these roof-rail airbags areintended to inflate during a rolloveror in a severe frontal impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbags,if equipped, and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Roof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbag,if equipped, is intended to inflate onthe side of the vehicle that is struck.Both roof-rail airbags will inflatewhen either side of the vehicle isstruck or if the sensing systempredicts that the vehicle is about toroll over on its side, or in a severefrontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.



For airbag location, see Where Arethe Airbags? (Canada) onpage 3‑26 or Where Are theAirbags? (Mexico) on page 3‑27.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk of

full or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑28.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes.

For location of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? (Canada)on page 3‑26 or Where Are theAirbags? (Mexico) on page 3‑27.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannot

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

get out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnthe interior lamps on, turn thehazard warning flashers on, andshut off the fuel system after theairbags inflate. You can lock thedoors, turn the interior lamps off,and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls forthose features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some new

parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑16 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑17.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.



Passenger SensingSystem (Canada)The vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

The symbol for on and off, will bevisible during the system check.If you use remote start, if equipped,to start the vehicle, you may not seethe system check. When the systemcheck is complete, either the symbolfor on or off, will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator(Canada) on page 5‑12.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag should be allowedto inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;

an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), no

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

system is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag, the off indicatorwill light and stay lit as a reminderthat the airbags are off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator(Canada) on page 5‑12.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front outboardpassenger seat. When thepassenger sensing system hasallowed the airbags to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbags areactive.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag,depending upon the person'sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly —whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3‑51 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑53.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion. Also makesure the child restraint is nottrapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjustthe head restraint. See HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbags for achild restraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure a childseat in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat.



Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specific

vehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑36 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on thepassenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is onthe seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicator willbe lit.



If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑12 forimportant safety information.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system.

To purchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑15.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, overhead console,front sensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

If the vehicle has rollover roof‐railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10‑57 forimportant information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicleis modified for any other reason,



call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices(Canada) on page 13‑4 or CustomerAssistance Offices (Mexico) onpage 13‑4.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑12.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? (Canada)on page 3‑26 or Where Are theAirbags? (Mexico) on page 3‑27.See your dealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and maynot protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑12.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, return to the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.



In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.

{ WARNING

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The child might also slide underthe lap belt. The belt force wouldthen be applied right on theabdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everyCanadian province says children upto some age must be restrainedwhile in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.



The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help achild to see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑45 formore information.



Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. ForCPST availability in Canada, check

with Transport Canada or theProvincial Ministry of Transportationoffice.

Securing the Child within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem or airbag switch hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. This system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.



When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.



The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the trim near theanchor.



The top tether anchors are on theback of the rear seatbacks. Be sureto use an anchor on the same sideof the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑44 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑44.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do not

use the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

When installing arear-facing child restraint, itmay be necessary to movethe front seat forward to

properly install the childrestraint per the childrestraint manufacturerinstructions. See SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Remove the cargo coverbefore installing the toptether. Place the cargocover on the floor of thecargo area. The cargocover should remain offwhile the top tether isin use.



2.3. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestraint and you are usinga single tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestraint and you are usinga dual tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestraint and you are usinga single tether, raise thehead restraint and route thetether under the headrestraint and in between thehead restraint posts.



If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestraint and you are usinga dual tether, raise the headrestraint and route thetether under the headrestraint and around thehead restraint posts.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑45 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑45 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑44.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For outboard second row seatingpositions, remove the safety beltfrom the guide. Do not securethe child restraint with the safetybelt routed through the guide.

When installing a rear-facingchild restraint, it may benecessary to move the front seatforward to properly install thechild restraint per the childrestraint manufacturerinstructions.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑45 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑44.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System(Canada) on page 3‑32 foradditional information.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑45 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑45 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.




Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.



Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the use ofthe top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑45 for more information.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo ManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Warning Triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

If equipped, pull the handle to open.

If equipped with upper storage, slidethe latch to open.


4-2 Storage

If equipped with storage above theglovebox, push the button to open.

Cupholders

If equipped, pull the rear seatarmrest down to access.

Sunglasses StorageThere may be sunglasses storageover the driver door. Pull to open.

Underseat Storage

If equipped with storage under thefront passenger seat, pull out toaccess the storage area.


Storage 4-3

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo ManagementSystemThis vehicle has a cargomanagement system in the rear.

Pull the strap to lift.

Fold the load floor. Place the hookfrom the load floor inside the hookon the side trim.

Convenience Net

The vehicle may have aconvenience net. Attach the net tothe cargo tie-downs.

The net is used to store small loadsand should not be used for heavyloads.


4-4 Storage

Warning Triangle

If equipped, the warning triangle isstowed in the rear storagecompartment.

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items.For roof racks that do not havecrossrails included, GM Certifiedcrossrails can be purchased as anaccessory. See your dealer foradditional information.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than75 kg (165 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers;otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle.

See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator (Canada) . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Service Vehicle SoonLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Descent Control SystemLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Power Steering WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Ultrasonic Parking SensorLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-19Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-19

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-21Immobilizer Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Reduced Engine PowerLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-22

Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-23Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-27


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up,down, forward, and backward.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.

b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith Bluetooth or OnStar, press tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑28or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)on page 7‑30 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑39 orOnStar Overview on page 14‑1.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toreject an incoming call, or end acurrent call. Press to silence thevehicle speakers while using theinfotainment system. Press again toturn the sound on.

For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ (Source): Press to selectan audio source.

Use to scroll up or down to selectthe next or previous favorite radiostation or CD/MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.



Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn.

Move the lever to one of thefollowing positions:

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn thex INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

b (Windshield Washer): Pull thewindshield wiper lever toward you tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers. The wipers willcontinue until the lever is releasedor the maximum wash time isreached. When the windshield wiperlever is released, additional wipesmay occur depending on how longthe windshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑21 for information on fillingthe windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10‑26.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.



Rear Window Wiper/WasherFor vehicles with the rear wiper/washer, the controls are on the endof the windshield wiper lever.

ON: Press the upper portion of thebutton for continuous rear windowwipes.

OFF: The rear wiper turns off whenthe button is returned to the middleposition.

INT (Intermittent Rear Wipes):Press the lower portion of the buttonto set a delay between wipes.

m = REAR (Rear Washer): Pushthe windshield wiper lever forwardto spray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The lever returns to itsstarting position when released.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑21.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

Setting the Compass Zone

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long trip or moving to anew area, the compass zone willneed to be reset. If the compass isnot set to the correct zone, it maygive false readings. The compasszone should be set to the area inwhich the vehicle is currentlytravelling.

Use the DIC buttons to set thecompass zone:

1. While the vehicle is in P (Park),press the MENU button todisplay the DIC menu.

2. Press and hold SET/CLR whilethe Set Area display is active.

3. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and zone number on themap. Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.



4. Usewx to change to thecorrect zone number.

5. Press SET/CLR to confirm thesetting.

Recalibrating the Compass

Whenever the DIC or the battery isdisconnected, the compass must berecalibrated. To do this, the vehiclemust be driven in circles. Onlycalibrate the compass in amagnetically clean and safelocation, such as an open parkinglot, where driving the vehicle incircles is not a danger. It issuggested to calibrate away fromtall buildings, utility wires, manholecovers, or other industrial structures,if possible.

If code 125 is displayed on the DIC,the compass needs to berecalibrated.

Use the DIC buttons to beginrecalibrating the compass:

1. While the vehicle is in P (Park),press the MENU button todisplay the DIC menu.

2. Press and hold SET/CLR whilethe Set Cal display is active.

3. Drive the vehicle in tight circles.The display will begin to flash.Continue driving in circles forabout 30 seconds. The compassdirection will be displayed.

Clock

Radio Without Touchscreen

The infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See Operation on page 7‑8for information about how to use themenu system.

Setting the Time and Date

1. Press H.

2. Select Set Time or Set Date.

3. Turn the Menu/Tune knob to thedesired value.

4. Press the Menu/Tune knob toselect the value.

5. Turn the Menu/Tune knob tochange the desired value.

6. To save and return to the TimeSettings menu, press / BACKbutton at any time.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format

1. Press the H.

2. Select Set Time Format.

3. Press the Menu/Tune knob toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

Setting the Month and DayFormat

1. Press the H.

2. Select Set Date Format.

3. Turn the Menu/Tune knob to thedesired setting.



4. Press the Menu/Tune knob toselect the DD/MM/YYYY (day/month/year), MM/DD/YYYY(month/day/year), or YYYY/MM/DD (year/month/day) displayformat.

Radio With Touchscreen

The infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See Operation on page 7‑8for information about how to use themenu system.

Setting the Time and Date

1. PressD, and then presssettings.

2. Press time and date settings,and then set time and date.

3. Pressy orz to adjust thevalue.

4. Press OK.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format

1. PressD , and then presssettings.

2. Press time and date settings,and then set time format.

3. Select 12/24 HR Format.

Setting the Month and DayFormat

1. PressD , and then presssettings.

2. Press time and date settings,and then set date format.

3. Set the date display to DD/MM/YYYY (day/month/year), MM/DD/YYYY (month/day/year),or YYYY/MM/DD (year/month/day) display format.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has an accessorypower outlet in front of thecupholders on the center stack.There may also be one on the rearof the center console.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.



Certain accessory power plugs maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑44.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterFor vehicles with a cigarette lighter,it is located in the center floorconsole.

The ignition must be turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

To activate the cigarette lighter,push it into the heating element andlet go. When the lighter is ready itwill pop back out.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.

AshtraysThe vehicle may have a removableashtray.

The removable ashtray can beplaced in the front cupholders. Toopen the removable ashtray, lift thelid of the ashtray. After using, closethe lid.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

Mexico Shown, Canada Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

Odometer

The odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip Odometer

The trip odometer measures thedistance the vehicle has beendriven since the function was lastreset.

To reset the trip odometer to zero,press and hold the reset button onthe lower right of the tachometerwhile the trip odometer is beingdisplayed. Be careful not to resetthe engine oil life monitoraccidentally.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

The fuel gauge indicates about howmuch fuel is left when the ignition isturned to ON/RUN.

When the tank nears empty, the lowfuel warning light will come on.There is still a little fuel left, but thevehicle's fuel tank should be filledsoon. See Low Fuel Warning Lighton page 5‑21 for more information.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates on which side of thevehicle the fuel door is located.



Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the gas

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The indicator moves a little whenturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

The vehicle may also have apassenger safety belt reminder light.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.

This cycle continues several times ifthe front passenger remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the front passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop, or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.



Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system (if equipped), thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System (Canada) onpage 3‑22 or Airbag System(Mexico) on page 3‑24.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator (Canada)The vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System (Canada) onpage 3‑32 for important safetyinformation. The instrument panelhas a passenger airbag statusindicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a systemcheck. If you use remote start,if equipped, to start the vehicle, youmay not see the system check.Then, after several seconds, thestatus indicator will light the on or offsymbol to let you know the status ofthe front outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag.

If the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag are allowed to inflate.



If the off symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

This light will come on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on, and theengine is not running, as a check toshow it is working.

It should go out when the engine isstarted. If it stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery. If a shortdistance must be driven with thelight on, turn off all accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner, to help reduce the drainon the battery.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inON/RUN, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9‑14 formore information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that the



OBD II system has detected aproblem and diagnosis and servicemight be required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) can

affect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑42. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.



. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑40.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on when

the ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.



Service Vehicle SoonLight

For vehicles with this light, it comeson if a condition exists that mayrequire the vehicle to be taken in forservice.

If the light comes on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Brake System WarningLightWith the ignition on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. If thevehicle is driven with the parkingbrake engaged, a chime soundswhen the vehicle speed is greaterthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

The vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

If the warning light comes on and achime sounds there could be abrake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

This light can also come on due tolow brake fluid. See Brake Fluid onpage 10‑22 for more information.

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to ON/RUN.If it does not come on then, have itfixed so it is ready to warn if there isa problem.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to pushor might go closer to the floor. It cantake longer to stop. If the light is stillon, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑71.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light stays on, turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF or if the light comeson, stop as soon as possible andturn the ignition off. Then start theengine again to reset the system.If the light still stays on, or comeson again while driving, the vehicleneeds service. See your dealer.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the brakes will stillwork, but the antilock brakes will notwork. If the regular brake systemwarning light is also on, the antilockbrakes will not work and there is a

problem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑16.

The ABS warning light will come onbriefly when the ignition is turned toON/RUN. This is normal. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn if there isa problem.

Up-Shift Light

The vehicle may have an up-shiftlight.

When this light comes on, shift tothe next higher gear if weather,road, and traffic conditions allow.

Descent Control SystemLight

When the DCS light comes onsteady, the system is ready for use.When the light flashes, the systemis active.

See Descent Control System (DCS)on page 9‑33 for more information.



Power Steering WarningLight

This light comes on briefly when theignition is turned to ON/RUN as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If this light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, the system may not beworking. If this happens, see yourdealer for service.

Ultrasonic ParkingSensor Light

This light comes on to indicate thatthere is a malfunction in the system.See your dealer for service.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑36 for more information.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by your

dealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑30 and StabiliTrak®




StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the TCS is off, the system doesnot assist in controlling the vehicle.Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTraksystems and the warning lightturns off.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑30 and StabiliTrak®


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak or Traction ControlSystem (TCS) indicator/warninglight comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑31 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑30.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by the dealer. If the systemis working normally the indicatorlight goes off.

Notice: The engine coolanttemperature warning lightindicates that the vehicle hasoverheated. Driving with this lighton can damage the engine and it



may not be covered by thevehicle warranty. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑18.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑18.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑48.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑50.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.



If the vehicle has low engine oilpressure, this light will stay on afterthe engine is started, or come onwhile driving.

This indicates that the engine is notreceiving enough oil. The enginecould be low on oil, or could havesome other oil problem. Have itfixed immediately by your dealer.

The oil pressure light could alsocome on in other situations:. When the ignition is on but the

engine is not running, the lightwill come on as a test to show itis working. The light will go outwhen the ignition is turned on.If it does not come on with theignition on, there may be aproblem with the fuse or bulb.Have it fixed right away.

. If the vehicle comes to a hardstop, the light may come on for amoment. This is normal.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

This light comes on when thevehicle is low on fuel.

The low fuel warning light comes onwhen there are approximately 6.0 L(1.7 gal) of fuel remaining inthe tank.

To turn the light off, add fuel to thefuel tank. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑42.

Immobilizer Light

The immobilizer light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the immobilizersystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2‑10.



Reduced Engine PowerLight

The reduced engine power lightshould come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

This light, along with the malfunctionindicator lamp, displays when anoticeable reduction in the vehicle'sperformance occurs. Stop thevehicle and turn off the ignition. Wait10 seconds and restart the vehicle.This might correct the condition.

The vehicle can be driven at areduced speed when the reducedengine power light is on butacceleration and speed might bereduced. The performance could bereduced until the next time thevehicle is driven. If this light stayson, see your dealer as soon aspossible for diagnosis and repair.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2.

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light

This light turns on whenever theDaytime Running Lamps are in use.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)on page 6‑2.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with front fog lamps,this light comes on when the frontfog lamps are in use.



The light goes out when the frontfog lamps are turned off. See FrontFog Lamps on page 6‑4 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls on page 6‑1.

Cruise Control Light

For vehicles with cruise control, thecruise control light is white when thecruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise controlis set and active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑34.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays information aboutyour vehicle. It also displayswarning messages if a systemproblem is detected. See VehicleMessages on page 5‑27. Allmessages appear in the DIC displayin the instrument cluster.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by using theDIC buttons on the turn signal leveron the left side of the steeringwheel. The DIC displays trip, fuel,and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

DIC Buttons

1. SET/CLR: Press to set or clearthe menu item displayed. This isnot used to reset the tripodometer. To reset the tripodometer, use the reset buttonon the tachometer in theinstrument cluster.

2. wx (Thumbwheel): Use toscroll through the items ineach menu.

3. MENU: Press to display the DICmenus. This button is also usedto return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

DIC Menu Items

Press MENU to view the DICmenus. Some items display in theupper display area, some in thelower display area, and others useboth the upper and lower displayareas. Usewx to scroll throughthe menu items. Not all items areavailable on every vehicle. Thefollowing is a list of all possiblemenu items:. Average Speed. Fuel Range. Average Fuel Economy. Timer. Remaining Oil Life. Units. Language. Tire Learn. Compass



Average Speed

Canada Shown, Mexico Similar

This display shows the averagespeed. To reset the average speedto zero, press and hold the SET/CLR button while the averagespeed is displayed.

Fuel Range

This displays the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy overrecent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in thefuel tank.

Average Fuel Economy

Canada Shown, Mexico Similar

This display shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles pergallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.To reset the average fuel economy,

press and hold the SET/CLR buttonwhile the average fuel economy isdisplayed.

Timer

This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press SET/CLRwhile the timer is displayed. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time theignition is off. The timer will recordup to 99:59 hours, after which thedisplay will return to zero. To resetthe timer to zero, press and holdSET/CLR.



Remaining Oil Life

This menu is not available while thevehicle is moving. This displayshows an estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life. If 99: % isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the Code 82 message will appearon the display. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9. In additionto the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Remember, the oil life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the oil life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press the

SET/CLR button while the oil lifedisplay is active. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑11.

Units

This menu is not available while thevehicle is moving. Press SET/CLRwhile the unit display is active andmovewx to change units whenUNIT SET is displayed. Press SET/CLR to confirm the setting. Select 1,2, or 3 for the unit display. 1 isImperial units, 2 is US units, and 3is metric units. This will change thedisplays on the cluster and DIC tothe type of measurements selected.

Language

This menu is not available while thevehicle is moving. Press SET/CLRwhile the language display is activeand movewx to change thelanguage of the displays whenLANG SET is displayed. Select 1 or2 for the language display. 1 isAlphabet and 2 is Arabic Numeral.Press SET/CLR to confirm thesetting.

Tire Learn

This menu is not available while thevehicle is moving. This displayallows for matching of the TPMSsensors. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑49 and TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑50.

Compass

See Compass on page 5‑4 forinformation on setting andrecalibrating the compass.



Vehicle MessagesDIC messages display when thestatus of the vehicle has changedand action may be needed tocorrect the condition. Multiplemessages appear one after another.

Press any of the DIC buttons on theturn signal lever to acknowledgeand clear them from the display.More urgent messages cannot becleared from the DIC display. Allmessages should be takenseriously. Clearing messages willnot correct the problem.

Vehicle messages appear as codenumbers.

15: Center High Mounted BrakeLamp Failure

16: Service Brake Lamps

21: Left Front Position LampFailure

22: Right Front Position LampFailure

23: Back-up Lamp Failure

24: License Plate Lamp Failure

25: Left Front Turn Indicator Failure

26: Left Rear Turn Indicator Failure

27: Right Front Turn IndicatorFailure

28: Right Rear Turn IndicatorFailure

73: Service All Wheel Drive System

82: Change Engine Oil Soon

84: Engine Power Is Reduced

89: Service Vehicle Soon

125: Compass Calibrating — Drivein Circles

173: All Wheel Drive Off

VehiclePersonalizationPersonalization Menu (RadioWithout Touchscreen)

The audio system controls andtouchscreen are used to access thepersonalization menus forcustomizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

CONFIG (Configuration): Press toaccess the ConfigurationSettings Menu.

MENU/TUNE: Turn to scrollthrough the menus or setup items.Press to enter the menus and selectthe menu items.

/ BACK : Press to exit, or return tothe previous screen or menu.



To access a menu:

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toselect the desired menu.

3. Press the MENU/TUNE knob.

Settings menus and functions mayvary depending on vehicle option.

Press the CONFIG button and thefollowing list of menu items may beavailable:. Languages. Time and Data Settings. Radio Settings. Vehicle Settings. Comfort & Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems

Language

Select the Language menu and thefollowing may be displayed:. English. French

. Spanish

1. Turn MENU/TUNE to the desiredlanguage.

2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob toselect.

Press / BACK to go back to thelast menu.

Time and Data Settings

Select the Time and Data Settingsmenu and the following may bedisplayed:. Set Time. Set Data. Set Time Format. Set Date Format. Auto Time Adjust

Set Time

Select this to manually set the time.

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tothe desired value.

2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob toselect the value.

3. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tochange the desired value.


Set Date

Select this to manually set the date.



3. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tochange the desired value.


Set Time Format

Select this to set the 12/24 hourformat.

1. Press the MENU/TUNE knob toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.



Set Date Format

Select this to set the month and dayformat.

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tothe desired setting.

2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob toselect the DD/MM/YYYY (day/month/year), MM/DD/YYYY(month/day/year), or YYYY/MM/DD (year/month/day) displayformat.

Auto Time Adjust

Select this to turn the auto timeadjust on or off.

1. Press the MENU/TUNE knob toturn On or Off.

Radio Settings

Select the Radio Settings menu andthe following may be displayed:. Auto Volume. Maximum Startup Volume. Radio Favorites

Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.



Maximum Startup Volume

Select this to manually set thestartup volume of the radio.

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toincrease or decrease the value.

2. To save press the MENU/TUNEor / BACK button.

Radio Favorites

This feature allows for the manuallysetting of the number of favoritepages.

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toselect 1-6.


Vehicle Settings

Select the Radio Settings menu andthe following may be displayed:. Comfort and Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Lock, Unlock, Settings. Vehicle Factory Settings

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing may be displayed:. Chime Volume. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

Chime Volume

Select this to set the chime volumelevel to Normal or High.

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toselect Chime Volume.




3. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tothe desired level.

4. Press the MENU/TUNE knob toselect the level.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

This allows selection of the AutoWipe in Reverse Gear feature to beturned on or off. When on, and thefront wipers are on, the rear windowwiper will turn on automaticallywhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toselect Auto Wipe inReverse Gear.

2. Press the MENU/TUNE knob toturn On or Off.

Collision/Detection Systems

If equipped, select the Collision/Detection Systems menu and ParkAssist will be displayed.

Park Assist

Select this to set the UltrasonicParking Assist feature, audible only,to be turned on or off.

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toselect Park Assist.


3. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toselect On or Off.

4. Press the MENU/TUNE knob toconfirm.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing may be displayed:. Exit Lighting

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle and it isdark outside.

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tothe desired time.


Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing may be displayed:. Auto Door Unlock. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Delayed Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park),select from All Doors, Driver Door,or Off.

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tothe desired selection.


Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If Off is selected, the



Delayed Door Lock menu will beavailable and the door will lock asprogrammed through this menu.

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toOn or Off.


Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors after the lastdoor is closed.

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toOn or Off.


Lock, Unlock, Settings

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing may be displayed:. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Light and Horn

Feedback. Remote Door Unlock

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter, select FlashLights or Lights Off.



Remote Lock Light and HornFeedback

This allows the selection of whattype of feedback is given whenpressing Q on the RKE transmitter,select from Lights and Horn, Lightsonly, Horn Only, or Off.



Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter, select from AllDoors or Driver Door.

When set to Driver Door, the driverdoor will unlock the first time K ispressed and all doors will unlockwhen the button is pressed asecond time. When set to All Doors,all of the doors will unlock at the firstpress of K.



Vehicle Factory Settings

Select Vehicle Factory Settings toreturn all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Press MENU/TUNE whenVehicle Factory Settings is selectedand open the menu. Select Yes orNo by turning and pressing theMENU/TUNE knob.



Personalization Menu (RadioWith Touchscreen)

Settings can be made with theignition ON and the vehicle notmoving.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

D (Home): Press to access theHome Page Menu.

Q or R : Press to scroll through themenus or setup items.

4 : Press to exit, or return to theprevious screen or menu.

To access the menu:

1. PressD.

2. Press Settings.

3. Press Vehicle Settings.

Press the menu item to select it.Each of the menus is detailed in thefollowing information.

Settings menus and functions mayvary depending on vehicle option.

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Climate & Air Quality. Cluster display info. Comfort & Convenience. Collision/detection. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Lock, Unlock Settings. Rear Camera Option. Vehicle Factory Settings. Sport Mode Settings. Language. Text Scroll. Touch Beep Volume. Max Startup Volume. About. DivX® VOD

Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following may bedisplayed:. Auto Fan Speed. Auto Compartment Zone Temp. Rear Zone Temp. Air Quality Sensor. Air Conditioning Mode. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog. Auto Cooled Vented Seats. Auto Heated Seats. Remote Start Auto Seat Cool. Remote Start Heated Seats

Auto Fan Speed

This allows the selection of theautomatic fan speed. It can beadjusted to run lower or higher thannormal.



Press Auto Fan Speed whenhighlighted. Select Low, Medium,or High. Press4.

Auto Compartment Zone Temp

This allows the selection of thecompartment zone temperaturesetting when the vehicle isrestarted.

Press Auto Compartment ZoneTemp when highlighted. SelectSingle Zone, Dual Zone, or LastSetting. Press4.

Rear Zone Temp

This allows the selection of the reartemperature setting when thevehicle is restarted.

Press Rear Zone Temp whenhighlighted. Select Off, Rear MimicFront, or Rear Last Known.Press4.

Air Quality Sensor

This allows the selection of whetherthe system will operate at high orlow sensitivity.

Press Air Quality Sensor whenhighlighted. Select Off, LowSensitivity, High Sensitivity.Press4.

Air Conditioning Mode

This allows the selection ofautomatic start of the airconditioning upon vehicle start.Selecting On indicates the airconditioning will be on when thevehicle is started. Selecting Offturns the air conditioning off eachtime the vehicle is started. LastSetting will resume the last settingwhen the vehicle was shut off.

Press Air Conditioning Mode whenhighlighted. Select Off, On, or LastSetting. Press4.

Auto Defog

This allows the auto defog to beturned on or off.

Press Auto Defog when highlighted.Select On or Off. Press4.

Auto Rear Defog

This allows the auto rear defog tobe turned on or off. This feature willautomatically turn on the rearwindow defogger when it is coldoutside.

Press Auto Rear Defog whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Auto Cooled Vented Seats

When on, this feature will turn thecooled seats on when using remotestart on warm days.

Press Auto Cooled Vented Seatswhen highlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Auto Heated Seats

When on, this feature will turn theheated seats on.

Press Auto Heated Seats whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.



Remote Start Auto Seat Cool

When on, this feature will turn thecooled seats on when using theremote start on hot days.

Press Remote Start Auto Seat Coolwhen highlighted and open themenu. Select On or Off. Press4.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When on, this feature will turn theheated seats on when using theremote start on cold days.

Press Remote Start Heated Seatswhen highlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Cluster Display Info

Select the Cluster Display Infomenu and the following may bedisplayed:. Cluster Eco Telltale

Cluster Eco Telltale

This allows eco telltale informationdisplay to be turned on or off.

Press Cluster Eco Telltale whenhighlighted. Select On or Off or turn.Press4.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing may be displayed:. Chime Volume. Easy Exit Steering Column. Easy Exit Driver Seat. Auto Parking Mirror Tilt. Personalization By Driver. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

Chime Volume

This allows selection of the chimevolume level.

Press Chime Volume whenhighlighted. Select Normal or High.Press4.

Easy Exit Steering Column

This allows the selection of theEasy Exit Steering Column positionwhen exiting the vehicle.

Press Easy Exit Steering Columnwhen highlighted. Select Off,On-Column In, On-Column Up,On-Column In & Up. Press4.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This will move the seat back tomake it easier to exit the vehicle.

Press Easy Exit Driver Seat whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Auto Parking Mirror Tilt

This allows the selection of thereverse tilt mirror feature on or off.When on, both the driver andpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.They will return to their previousdriving position when the vehicle is



shifted out of R (Reverse), theignition is turned to OFF, or thevehicle is left in reverse.

Press Auto Parking Mirror whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Personalization By Driver

This allows the Personalization byDriver feature to be turned on or off.

Press Personalization By Driverwhen highlighted and open themenu. Select On or Off. Press4.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

This allows selection of the AutoWipe in Reverse Gear feature to beturned on or off. When on, and thefront wipers are on, the rear windowwiper will turn on automaticallywhen the vehicle is shifted intoR♦(Reverse).

Press Auto Wipe in Reverse Gearwhen highlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and the followingmay be displayed:. Park Assist. Towbar Attached. Side Blind Zone Alert

Park Assist

This allows the Ultrasonic ParkingAssist feature, audible only, to beturned on or off.

Press Park Assist when highlighted.Select On or Off. Press4.

Towbar Attached

This allows the towbar feature to beturned on or off .

Press Towbar Attached whenhighlighted. Select Off, On,or Towbar Attached. Press4.

Side Blind Zone Alert

This allows the Side Blind ZoneAlert feature to be turned on or off.

Press Side Blind Zone Alert whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing may be displayed:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off. The vehiclelocator lights come on whenunlocking the vehicle with theRKE transmitter.

Press Vehicle Locator Lights whenhighlighted. Select Off, 30 Sec,60 Sec, or 120 Sec. Press4.

Exit Lighting

This allows selection of how longthe exterior lamps stay on whenleaving the vehicle and it is darkoutside.



Press Exit Lighting whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing may be displayed:. Auto Door Unlock. Auto Door Lock. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Delayed Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press Auto Door Unlock whenhighlighted. Select All Doors, DriverDoor, or Off. Press4.

Auto Door Lock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically lock whenthe vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

Press Auto Door Lock whenhighlighted. Select On or Off or turn.Press4.

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If Off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable and the door will lock asprogrammed through this menu.

Press Unlocked Door Anti Lock Outwhen highlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. Three chimes will signal thatdelayed locking is in use. Pressingeither Q or K on the RKEtransmitter twice will override thedelayed locking feature andimmediately lock all of the doors.

Press Delayed Door Lock whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Lock, Unlock Settings

Select Lock, Unlock Settings andthe following may be displayed:. Passive Entry Unlock. Passive Entry Lock. Sliding Door Selection. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Light & Horn

Feedback. Remote Door Unlock. Relock Remotely Unlocked

Doors. Relock Unlocked Doors. Memory Remote Recall. Remote Start. Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder



Passive Entry Lock

This feature can be turned on or offor to select feedback when usingthe button on the driver door to lockthe vehicle.

Press Passive Entry Lock whenhighlighted. Select Off, On, or Onwith Active Chirp. Press4.

Passive Entry Unlock

This specifies of which doors areunlocked by pressing the button onthe outside door handle.

Press Delayed Door Lock whenhighlighted. Select All Doors orDriver Door. Press4.

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Press Remote Unlock LightFeedback when highlighted. SelectFlash Lights or Lights Off. Press4.

Remote Lock Light & HornFeedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when pressing Qon the RKE transmitter.

Press Remote Lock Light & HornFeedback when highlighted. SelectLights only, Lights & Horn, hornOnly, or Off. Press4.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Press Remote Door Unlock whenhighlighted. Select All Doors orDriver Door. When set to DriverDoor Only, the driver door willunlock the first time K is pressedand all doors will unlock when thebutton is pressed a second time.When set to All Doors, all of thedoors will unlock at the firstpress of K. Press4.

Relock Remotely Unlocked Doors

When on, if the doors are unlockedfrom the RKE transmitter and a dooris not opened after a period of time,the doors will automatically relock.

Press Relock Remotely UnlockedDoors when highlighted. Select Onor Off. Press4.

Relock Unlocked Door

When on, the doors willautomatically lock after a period oftime not entering or exiting thevehicle.

Press Relock Unlocked Door whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Memory Remote Recall

This allows the Memory RemoteRecall feature to be turned on or off.

When on, this feature will recall thecurrent driver's last seat, outsidemirrors upon unlocking the driverdoor with the RKE, and opening that



door. The current driver is identifiedwhen the RKE transmitter is used tounlock the driver door.

Memory Remote Recall is when thememorized settings will be recalledwhen the vehicle is unlocked.

Press Memory Remote Recall whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Remote Start

This allows the remote start featureto be turned on or off.

Press Remote Start whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder

This allows the Remote Left inVehicle Reminder feature to beturned on or off. If on, the horn willchirp if a remote is left in thevehicle.

Press Remote Left in VehicleReminder when highlighted. SelectOn or Off. Press4.

Rear Camera Option

Select Rear Camera Option and thefollowing may be displayed:. Guidelines

Guidelines

This feature will turn on theguidelines in the rear cameradisplay.

Press Guidelines when highlighted.Select On or Off. Press4.

Vehicle Factory Settings

Select Vehicle Factory Settings toreturn all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Press Vehicle FactorySettings when highlighted. SelectYes or No. Press4.

Sport Mode Settings

Select Sport Mode Settings and thefollowing may be displayed:. Sport Suspension. Powertrain Performance

. Sport Steering

. All Wheel Drive Steering

. Instrument Lighting

Sport Suspension

This feature will turn on the sportsuspension feature.

Press Sport Suspension whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Powertrain Performance

This feature will turn on thepowertrain performance feature.

Press Powertrain Performancewhen highlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Sport Steering

This feature will turn on the sportsteering feature on.

Press Sport Steering whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.



All Wheel Drive Steering

This feature will turn on the allwheel drive steering feature.

Press All Wheel Drive Steeringwhen highlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Instrument Lighting

This feature will turn on theinstrument lighting feature.

Press Instrument Lighting whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Language

Select the Language menu and thefollowing may be displayed:. English. French. Spanish

Press Language when highlighted.Select the language desired.Press4.

Text Scroll

This allows the Text Scroll feature tobe turned on or off.

When on, if there is long textdisplayed on the audio screen, thetext is scrolled. When off, the text isscrolled once and displayed intruncated form.

Press Text Scroll when highlighted.Select On or Off. Press4.

Touch Beep Volume

This allows the Touch Beep Volumefeature to be turned on or off.

When on, a beep will be heardwhen pressing the screen. Whenoff, the beep is canceled.

Press Touch Beep Volume whenhighlighted. Select On or Off.Press4.

Max Startup Volume

This allows the startup volume ofthe infotainment system to be set.

Press Max Startup Volume whenhighlighted. Press S or T select thedesired volume between 9-21.Press4.

About

Select the About menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. System Version. Legal Information

System Version

Press System Version whenhighlighted to view the version ofthe infotainment system. Press4.



Legal Information

Press Legal Information whenhighlighted to view the Open sourceinformation. Press4.

DivX VOD

Press DivX VOD when highlighted.. DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital

video format created by DivX,LLC, a subsidiary of RoviCorporation. This is an officialDivX Certified® device that playsDivX video. See divx.com formore information and softwaretools on how to convert files intoDivX videos.

. DIVX VIDEO-ON DEMAND: ThisDivX Certified device must beregistered in order to playpurchased DivXVideo-on-Demand (VOD)movies. To obtain a registrationcode, locate the DivX VODsection in the device setupmenu. See vod.divx.com formore information on how tocomplete the registration.

Press4.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesBattery Load Management . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is to theleft of the steering column on theinstrument panel.

There are four positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic lamp controloff or on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps

; (Parking Lamps): Turns theparking lamps on together with thefollowing:. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps


6-2 Lighting

5 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together with thelamps listed below. A warning chimesounds if the driver door is openedwhen the ignition switch is off andthe headlamps are on.. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps

# (Front Fog Lamps): Forvehicles with fog lamps, press toturn the lamps on or off.

See Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

When the lights are on,; will belit. See Lamps On Reminder onpage 5‑23.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer3 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): Push the turn signallever away from you and release, toturn the high beams on.

To return to low beams, push thelever again or pull it toward you andrelease.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever all the way towardyou. Then release it.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps can makeit easier for others to see the front ofyour vehicle during the day. Fullyfunctional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first soldin Canada.

A light sensor on top of theinstrument panel makes the DRLwork, so be sure it is not covered.


Lighting 6-3

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is in the ON/

RUN mode.. The exterior lamp control is

in AUTO.. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, only thelow-beam headlamps, at a reducedlevel of brightness, will be on. Thetaillamps, sidemarker, instrumentpanel, and other lamps will notbe on.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps go off and the DRLcome on.

To turn the DRL off or on again, turnthe exterior lamp control to the offposition and then release. Forvehicles first sold in Canada, theDRL cannot be turned off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe exterior lamp control is in theautomatic position, the headlampscome on automatically. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1.

The vehicle has a light sensor ontop of the instrument panel. Makesure it is not covered, or theheadlamps will be on when they arenot needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.


6-4 Lighting

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press and momentarily hold thisbutton to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.This warns others that you arehaving trouble. Press andmomentarily hold again to turn theflashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterwill flash in the direction of the turnor lane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. The turn signal flashesthree times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out. Replace anyburned out bulbs. If a bulb is notburned out, check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑33.

Front Fog Lamps

For vehicles with front fog lamps,the button is on the outboard side ofthe instrument panel.

The ignition must be on to turn onthe fog lamps.


Lighting 6-5

# (Front Fog Lamps): Press toturn the fog lamps on or off. Anindicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the foglamps are on.

The fog lamps come on togetherwith the parking lamps.

If the high-beam headlamps areturned on, the fog lamps will turn off.If the high-beam headlamps areturned off, the fog lamps will turnback on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen. Thethumbwheel is to the left of thesteering column on the instrumentpanel.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Move thethumbwheel up or down and hold, tobrighten or dim the instrument panelcontrols and infotainment displayscreen.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come onautomatically when any door isopened and the dome lamp is in thedoor position.


6-6 Lighting

Dome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are in theheadliner above the rear seats.

9 (Dome Lamp Override): Pressto turn the lamps off, even when adoor is open.

H (Door): When the button isreturned to the middle position, thelamps turn on automatically when adoor is opened.

R (On): Press to turn on the domelamps.

Reading Lamps

For vehicles with front readinglamps, they are in the overheadconsole.

# or$ (Reading Lamps): Pressto turn each lamp on or off.

Lighting Features

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.


Lighting 6-7

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable tothe driver.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.

If some interior lamps are left onand the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off aftersome time.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview (AM-FM Radio) . . . . . 7-3Overview (Radio withCD/USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Overview (Radio withTouchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Home Page (Radio withTouchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-18Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

NavigationOnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-28Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

Downloadable ApplicationsSmartphone Link(Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Smartphone Link(Pandora) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Smartphone Link(Stitcher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Bluetooth Phone/DevicesPictures and Movies (AudioSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Pictures and Movies (PictureSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

Pictures and Movies (MovieSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61


7-2 Infotainment System

Introduction

InfotainmentDetermine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

See Defensive Driving on page 9‑3.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

Customer Assistance

Assistance is available to help withBluetooth pairing, applicationdownloading and installation, othermobile device interface, andoperation support of theinfotainment system. Specialists areavailable when calling thisCustomer Assistance number:U.S. (855) 4 SUPPORT (478-7767).

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe infotainment system has anelectronic security system installedto prevent theft.

The infotainment system only worksin the vehicle in which it was firstinstalled, and cannot be used inanother vehicle.



Overview (AM-FM Radio)

1. O /VOL (Power/Volume)

. Press to turn the system onand off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

2. PRESET Buttons 1−6. Press and hold to store a

station.. Press to go to a preset

favorite station.

3. MENU/TUNE. Press to open menus and

select menu items.. Turn to highlight menu

items or to set values whilein a menu.

. Turn to manually selectradio stations.

4. FAV 123 (Favorites). Press to go to a

favorite page.

5. INFO (Information). Press to view current radio

station and current songinformation.

6. SEEK ¨ (Next)

. Press to seek the nextstation.

. Press and hold to fastforward through thecurrently playing song onan external audio device.



7. © SEEK (Previous)

. Press to seek the previousstation.

. Press and hold to reversethrough the currentlyplaying song on an externalaudio device.

8. AUX (Auxiliary). Press to access the

auxiliary input device.

9. RADIO/BAND. Press to select AM, FM,

or band.. Press to select the radio

when listening to a differentaudio source.

10. H (Clock)

. Press to enter the timeand date settings menu.

11. TONE. Press to open the

tone menu.

12. CONFIG (Configuration). Press to open the System

Configuration menu.

13. / BACK

. Press to go to theprevious screen.

. Press to cancel enteredcontent.

14. 5 /> (Phone/Mute)

. Press to open the phonemain menu.

. Press to mute the audiosystem.



Overview (Radio with CD/USB) 1. O /VOL (Power/Volume)

. Turns the system on or offand adjusts the volume.

2. Z (Eject)

. Removes a disc from theCD slot.

3. Buttons 1−6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.

4. AUX Port. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) connection

for external devices.

5. MENU/TUNE. Radio: Manually selects

radio stations.. CD: Selects tracks.

6. FAV 1-2-3 (Favorites). Radio: Opens the

favorites list.



7. INFO (Information). Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

8. CD Slot

9. SEEK ¨. Radio: Seeks the next

station.. CD: Selects the next track

or fast forwards within atrack.

10. © SEEK

. Radio: Seeks the previousstation.

. CD: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds within atrack.

11. CD/AUX. Selects the CD player or

an external audio source.

12. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a differentaudio source.

13. H (Clock Menu)

. Opens the Clock menu.

14. TONE. Opens the Tone menu.

15. CONFIG (Configuration). Opens the

Configuration menu.

16. / BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

17. 5 / > (Phone/Mute)

. Opens the Phone menu.

. Mutes the audio system.



Overview (Radio with Touchscreen)

1. z VOLy (Volume)

. Press to decrease orincrease the volume.

2. O (Power)

. Press and hold to turn thepower on or off.

3. D (Home Page)

. Press to go to the HomePage. See Home Page(Radio with Touchscreen)on page 7‑7.

Home Page (Radio withTouchscreen)

Touchscreen Buttons

Touchscreen buttons show on thescreen when available. When afunction is unavailable, the buttonmay gray out. When a function isselected, the button may highlight.

Home Page Features

PressF to go to the Home Page.

e audio: Press to select AM, FM,SiriusXM (if equipped), USB/iPod/Bluetooth Audio, or AUX.

G picture & movie: Press to viewa picture, movie, or auxiliary video.



7 telephone: Press to activatethe phone features (if equipped).See Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7‑28 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑30 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑39.

^ smartphone link: Press to listento Pandora or Stitcher. SeeSmartphone Link (Overview) onpage 7‑47 or Smartphone Link(Pandora) on page 7‑49 orSmartphone Link (Stitcher) onpage 7‑51.

8 settings: Press to access thePersonalization menu. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑27.

Operation

Radio Controls WithoutTouchscreen

The infotainment system isoperated by using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, and menusshown on the display.

Turning the System On or Off

O /VOL (Power/Volume): Press toturn the radio on and off.

Automatic Switch-Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is turnedoff, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

O / VOL (Power/Volume): Turn toadjust the volume.

5 / > (Phone/Mute): Press 5 / >to activate OnStar. See OnStar®


Press and hold 5 / > to mute the

infotainment system. Press 5 / >again or turn the O / VOL knob tocancel mute.

Menu System

Controls

The MENU/TUNE knob and/ BACK button are used tonavigate the menu system.

MENU/TUNE Knob:

Turn to:. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.

Press to:. Enter the menu system.. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.



/ BACK:

Press to:. Exit a menu.. Go back to the previous menu

screen.. Delete the last character in a

sequence.. Press and hold to delete the

entire character sequence.

Submenus

An arrow on the right-hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

Adjusting the Bass, Midrange,Treble, Fader, and Balance

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tothe desired tone.

3. Press the MENU/TUNE knob toselect the desired tone.

4. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toadjust the desired tone.

5. Press the MENU/TUNE knob tosave the setting.

Press the / BACK button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.

Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knobto EQ.

3. Press the MENU/TUNE knob.

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toselect one of the following, thenpress the MENU/TUNE knob toselect it.. OFF. Pop. Rock. Classical

. Talk

. Country

Press the / BACK button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.

System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

Up to six favorite pages can besaved, and each page can store upto six radio stations.

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:


2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages to display.

5. Press the / BACK button to goback to the SystemConfiguration menu.



Auto Volume

This feature automatically adjuststhe radio volume to compensate forroad and wind noise.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the feature canbe turned off.



3. Select Auto Volume.

4. Select the setting.

5. Press the / BACK button togo back to the SystemConfiguration menu.

Radio Controls WithTouchscreen

The infotainment system is operatedby using the pushbuttons, menusshown on the display, and steeringwheel controls.

Turning the System On or Off

O (Power): Press and hold to turnthe radio on and off.

Automatic Switch-Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is turnedoff, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

z VOLy (Volume): Press toincrease or decrease the volume orpress the volume bar.

> (Mute): Pressz VOLy, thenpress > to mute and unmute thesystem.

System Settings

Auto Volume

This feature automatically adjuststhe radio volume to compensate forroad and wind noise.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the feature canbe turned off.

1. PressD.

2. Select Settings.


4. Select Auto Volume.

5. Select the setting by pressing Sor T.

6. Press the4 screen button togo back to the SystemConfiguration menu.



Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

Tone Settings: Press menu, thentone settings from the AM orFM menu.

. EQ (Equalizer): Press S or T toselect a sound style or turn offthe sound style.

. Bass, Mid (Midrange), or Treble:Press − or + to change thedesired sound style from −12to +12.

. Fader or Balance: Adjust thefront/rear or left/right speakers.

. Reset: Restore the settings backto default settings.

Press OK to exit Tone Settings.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio WithoutTouchscreen

Audio Source Menu

O / VOL (Power/Volume): Press toturn the system on and off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

MENU/TUNE: Turn to change theradio station.

RADIO/BAND: Press to select AMand FM.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be available forthe current song.

FAV 123: Press to open thefavorites list and select afavorite page.

Preset Buttons 1–6: Press toselect preset stations.

Radio Broadcast DataSystem (RBDS)

RBDS is a service by FM stationsthat makes it easier to find radiostations with fault-free reception.

RBDS stations are indicated by theprogram name instead of thebroadcasting frequency.

View RBDS BroadcastInformation

Press the INFO button to view theRBDS broadcasting information thatis being received.

Selecting a Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose AM or FM. The last stationthat was playing starts playingagain.



Selecting an Auxiliary Device

Press the AUX button to select aconnected auxiliary device.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Press © SEEK¨ to automaticallysearch for available radio stations.

Press and hold © SEEK ¨ to changethe radio stations as desired, thenrelease to stop at the currentstation. Press and hold to fastforward or reverse through thecurrently playing song on anexternal audio device.

Favorites List

There are two ways to select astation from the Favorites List.. Continue pressing the FAV 123

button to select the desiredfavorite preset page.

. From AM or FM, turn the MENU/TUNE knob to select theFavorites List, then press toselect. The Favorites Listinformation will be displayed.Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tomove to the desired station fromthe Favorites List , then press toreceive the station.

Stations List

1. From AM or FM, turn the MENU/TUNE knob to select theStations List, then press toselect.

2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tomove to the desired station fromthe Stations List , then press toreceive the station.

Category List

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.



Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores the RDSstations sorted by program type inthe FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:

1. From FM, turn the MENU/TUNEknob to select FM Category List,then press the MENU/TUNE knob.

2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tomove to the desired station, thenpress the MENU TUNE knob toreceive the selectedbroadcasting channel.

Update Stations List

From AM or FM, turn the MENU/TUNE knob to select the Update AMor FM Stations List, then press theMENU/TUNE knob.

During the AM or FM broadcastinglist update, press the MENU/TUNEknob or / BACK button to stop theupdates.

Storing a Station as a Favorite


Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page.

Storing Stations

Press the FAV 123 button to selectthe desired page of saved favorites.

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingpreset button 1−6 until a beep isheard.

Playing the Radio WithTouchscreen

Audio Source Menu

z VOLy (Volume): Press toincrease or decrease the volume.

O (Power): Press and hold to turnthe system on and off.

D (Home Page): Press to enterthe Home Page.

RDS (Radio Data System)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This feature only workswhen the information from the radiostation is available. In rare cases, aradio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.



Selecting a Band

PressD, audio, then Source R tochoose AM, FM, or SiriusXM®,if equipped. The last station thatwas playing starts playing again.

Selecting an Auxiliary Device

Connect the auxiliary device to theAUX input terminal. Play will beginwhen the system has finishedreading the information on thedevice.

If the storage device is alreadyconnected, pressD, audio, SourceR, select AUX from the dropdown menu.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Pressg SEEKl to automaticallysearch for available radio stations.

Hold and drag to the left or right ofthe radio station to automaticallysearch for available radio stations.

Manual Tuning

Continue pressing q TUNE r tomanually change the radio station.

Favorite List

. From the AM or FM menu, pressfavorite list on the screen.

. Press Q or R to scroll throughthe list. Press on the station toselect it.

Station List

. From the AM or FM menu, pressAM or FM station list on thescreen.


Category List. From the FM menu, press FM

category list on the screen.




Update Station List

. From the AM or FM menu, pressupdate AM or FM station list onthe screen. The broadcasting listupdating will begin.

. During the AM or FMbroadcasting list update, pressCancel to stop the updates.

Storing a Station as a Favorite


Up to five stations can be stored ineach of the seven favorites pages.

Storing Stations


1. Select the desired station.

2. Press S or T to select thedesired page of saved favorites.

3. Hold down any of the presetbuttons to save the current radiostation to that button of theselected favorites page.

To change a preset button, tune tothe new desired radio station andhold the button.

Satellite RadioVehicles with a SiriusXM® SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid SiriusXMSatellite subscription can receiveSiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A service fee is required to receivethe SiriusXM service. For moreinformation, contact SiriusXM atwww.siriusxm.com or1-866-635-2349 (U.S.),and www.xmradio.ca or1-877-209-0079 (Canada).



Listening to SiriusXM Radio

1. PressD.

2. Press audio.

3. Press Source R.

4. From the drop-down menu,press XM and the most recentlistened to SiriusXM channel willdisplay.

Press4 to return to theHOME menu.

Selecting a Category

Continue pressing q Category rand the previous or next categorywill be selected.

Selecting a Channel

Press q Channel r and theprevious or next channel will beselected within the same category.

Press and hold q Channel r tojump four channels backward orforward in the same category, thenrelease the button at the desiredchannel.

Using the Preset Buttons

Up to seven favorites pages can besaved, and each page can store upto five channels.

To change a preset button, tune tothe new desired channel and holdthe button.

Listening to Preset Channels

1. Continue pressing S or T toselect the desiredfavorites page.

2. Press the preset button to listento the channel saved to thatbutton.

Using the SiriusXM Menu

Operation

1. Press MENU on the XM radioscreen.

2. Press the menu to select thedesired item or to display thedetail menu item.

3. Press4 to return to theprevious menu.



Favorite List

1. Press favorite list from the XMmenu. The favorite listinformation is displayed.

2. Press Q or R to find the desiredstation. Tune to the station byselecting it.

Channel List

1. Press XM channel list from theXM menu. The channel list isdisplayed.

2. Press Q or R to find the desiredchannel. Tune to the channel byselecting it.

Category List

1. Press XM category list from theXM menu. The category list isdisplayed.

2. Press Q or R to find the desiredcategory. Tune to the categoryby selecting it.

Direct Access

1. Press direct access from the XMmenu. The direct access screenis displayed.

2. Press the channel number totune to the desired channel.

3. Press OK.

Tone Settings

From the tone settings menu, thesound features can be set up forSiriusXM audio and each audioplayer’s functions.

1. Press the tone settings from theXM menu. The tone settingsscreen is displayed. See “ToneSettings” under Operation onpage 7‑8.

2. Press OK.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as mobilephone chargers, vehicleconvenience accessories, andexternal electronic devices areplugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference orstatic, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.



AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can occur whenthings like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. Whenthis happens, try reducing the trebleon the radio.

SiriusXM® Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Servicegives digital radio reception fromcoast to coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may causeloss of the SiriusXM signal for aperiod of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage can causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is located onthe roof of the vehicle.

Driving through an automatic carwash without removing the antennacould damage it.

To remove the antenna, turn itcounterclockwise. To replace theantenna, turn it clockwise until handtightened.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for the AM-FM radio, OnStar,the SiriusXM Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, and GPS (GlobalPositioning System), if the vehiclehas these features. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear reception.

Audio Players

CD PlayerThe vehicle may have a CD player.

The CD player can play audio CDsand MP3 CDs.

The CD player will not play8 cm (3 in) CDs.

Care of CDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from directsunlight and dust. If the bottomsurface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.



If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft, lint-free cloth,or dampen a clean, soft cloth in amild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it.Wipe the disc from the center to theouter edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add a label to a disc, as itcould get caught in the CD player.If a label is needed, label the top ofthe recorded disc with amarking pen.

Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminate thelens of the disc optics and damagethe CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs in

good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

AUX or CD/AUX: Press to use theCD player.

SEEK ¨ or © SEEK: Press toselect tracks or to fast forward orrewind within a track.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the current trackthat may be available.

MENU/TUNE: Turn to select tracks.Turn to enter the menu. Press toselect the menu.

Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.

Inserting a CD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the CD slot until itis drawn in.

Removing a CD

PressZ.

The disc is pushed out of theCD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or MP3 CD

Press the AUX or CD/AUX button.If there is a disc in the player, itbegins playing.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.



Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

. Press SEEK ¨ or © SEEK toselect the next or previous track.

. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob.

Using the CD Menu:

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob.

2. Select Tracks List.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setShuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and hold SEEK ¨ or © SEEKto fast forward or rewind within thecurrent track.

Selecting an MP3 Track

Using the control buttons:

. Press SEEK ¨ or © SEEK toselect the next or previous track.

. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Playlists/Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.


Searching for MP3 Tracks

The search feature may take sometime to display the information afterreading the disc due to the amountof information stored on the disc.FM automatically plays while thedisc is being read.

Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums

. Song Titles

. Genres

. Folder View

To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


USB PortThe USB Port, if equipped, is in thestorage area to the right of theinfotainment system. See Overview(Radio with Touchscreen) onpage 7‑7 or Overview (AM-FMRadio) on page 7‑3 or Overview(Radio with CD/USB) on page 7‑5.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7‑8.



1. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Auxiliary InputJack. See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑24.

2. USB Port.


For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem:. iPods. PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs). USB Drives. Zunes™

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system.

Connecting and Controllingan iPod®

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.

Searching for a Track

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres. Audiobooks. Composers



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audiobooks, or Composers.


Shuffle

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to On orOff, then press the / BACK buttonto return to the main screen.

On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then press the/ BACK button to return to the mainscreen.

On: Repeats the current track.

Off: Playback starts from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.



Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune™

Connecting a PFD or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

The infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.

Only the first 2,500 songs arerecognized on the device.

When a device is not supported, themessage “No supported data found.You can safely disconnect thedevice” appears.

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.


It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag display asUnknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists*. Artists. Albums. Song Titles



. Genres

. Folder View

*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.


The infotainment system can playmusic or movies by connecting anauxiliary device to the USB port,if equipped.

USB Support

USB Supported Devices. USB Flash Drives. Portable USB Hard Drives. 2G-5G iPod nano®

. 1G-3G iPod touch®

. 120GB/160GB iPod classic®

. 3G/3GS/4/4S iPhone®

Not all iPods and USB drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple® for properoperation. iPod firmware can be

updated using the latest iTunes®

application. See www.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying your iPod,go to www.apple.com/support.

The USB port can play both lowerand upper case .mp3, .wma, .ogg,and .wav files stored on a USBstorage device.

USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The Infotainment system supports:. Up to 2,500 folders.. Up to 10 folders in depth.. Up to 2,500 music files.. Up to 2,500 photo files.. Up to 250 movie files.. ID3 Tag (versions 1.0/1.1/2.2/

2.3/2.4).. FAT16.. FAT32.. exFAT.



Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod/iPhone

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB port.

To connect an iPod/iPhone, connectone end of the device’s cable to theiPod/iPhone and the other end tothe USB port.

The iPod/iPhone charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPod/iPhone automatically powers off andwill not charge or draw power fromthe vehicle's battery.

For more information on USBusage, see “Audio System” inPictures and Movies (Audio System)on page 7‑52 or Pictures andMovies (Picture System) onpage 7‑57 or Pictures and Movies(Movie System) on page 7‑59.

Auxiliary DevicesThe optional AUX input allowsportable devices to connect to thevehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)input jack. The AUX input jack,if equipped, is in the storage area tothe right of the infotainment system.A second AUX input is on the frontof the infotainment system,if equipped. See Overview (Radiowith Touchscreen) on page 7‑7 orOverview (AM-FM Radio) onpage 7‑3 or Overview (Radio withCD/USB) on page 7‑5.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7‑8.

1. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) AuxiliaryInput Jack

2. USB Port. See USB Port onpage 7‑20.


Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)jack can only be controlled usingthe controls on the device.



Adjusting the Volume

Turn the O /VOL knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.


The infotainment system can playmusic or movies connected by theauxiliary device.

Play will begin when the system hasfinished reading the information onthe device.

Playing Music

To play the music from the device,if the device is already connected:

1. PressD.

2. Press audio.

3. Press Source R.

4. Press AUX/USB.

To adjust the tone settings, see“Tone Settings” under “RadioControls with Touchscreen” inOperation on page 7‑8.

Playing Movies

Movies are not available whiledriving.

If the USB storage device is alreadyconnected:

1. PressD.

2. Press picture and movie.

3. Press Source R.

4. Press USB (Movie).

For iPod/iPhone, connect the iPod/iPhone to the AUX input terminal byusing the AUX cable for iPod/iPhone to play movie files.

Using the AUX Movie Menu

1. Press MENU from the AUXmovie screen. The AUX menu isdisplayed.

2. Press the desired menu.. tone settings: Adjust the

sound setup. See “ToneSettings” under “RadioControls with Touchscreen”in Operation on page 7‑8.



. clock/temp display: Todisplay the clock andtemperature on the fullscreen, select On or Off.

. display settings: Adjust thebrightness and contrast ofthe screen.

3. Press4.

Bluetooth Audio

Streaming Audio

If equipped, music may be playedfrom a paired Bluetooth. SeeBluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑28or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)on page 7‑30 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑39 for helppairing a device.

The music can be controlled bycontrols on the device.

To play music via Bluetooth:

1. Power on the device, pair, andconnect the device. The devicewill displayed “GM AudioSource.”

2. Once paired, press CD/AUX toselect Bluetooth Audio.

3. Press the play button on thedevice to begin playback.

When selecting Bluetooth audio, theradio may not be able to launch theaudio player on the connecteddevice to start playing. When thevehicle is not moving, choose thephone to begin playback.

All devices launch audio differently.When selecting Bluetooth audio asa source, the radio may show aspaused on the screen. Press playon the device to begin playback.

Some phones support sendingBluetooth music information todisplay on the radio. When the radioreceives this information, it willcheck to see if any album art isavailable and display it. For moreinformation about your phone andsupported Bluetooth features, seewww.gm.com/bluetooth.

Navigation

OnStar® SystemIf equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

For safety, some features aredisabled while the vehicle is inmotion.

Control Panel Overview

OnStar Light

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.



OnStar Buttons

X : Press to speak to an Advisor.. Make a call, end a call,

or answer an incoming call.. Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling

voice commands.. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn

Navigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

Q : Press to connect to anAdvisor.. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check on thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

] : Press to connect to anEmergency Advisor.

Hands-Free Calling

Press X to make a call, end a call,and answer an incoming call.

Press X to give OnStar Hands-FreeCalling voice commands.

Press X to give OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation voicecommands for automated directions.

. Press1 to hide theTurn-by-Turn Navigation screen.When the route is changed, theTurn-by-Turn Navigation screenis displayed. The Turn-by-TurnNavigation screen is onlydisplayed on the AM/FM/XMradio mode and AUX/USB/iPod mode.

. Press$ to mute theTurn-by-Turn Navigation voiceguidance.

. Press q to move to thenavigation settings menu.

‐ Press update route to updatethe route, then press Yes.Press Cancel route to cancel itor No to not update the route.

‐ Press cancel route to cancelthe route, then press Yes.The navigation settings menudisappears and theTurn-by-Turn Navigation voiceguidance is shut down.

‐ Press my destination tocheck the destination.The destination name andremaining distance todestination are displayed onthe screen for aboutfive seconds. Then the currentTurn-by-Turn Navigationinformation is displayed.



‐ Press route preview to previewthe route. The distanceinformation among turns fromcurrent position to destinationcan be checked. Check thedistance information bypressing Q or R. If there is nooperation for aboutfive seconds, the currentTurn-by-Turn Navigationinformation is displayed.

‐ Press repeat to repeat theTurn-by-Turn Navigation voiceguidance.

‐ While the route is calculating,the Cancel route menu is onlyactivated.

Blue OnStar

PressQ to be connected to aspecially trained OnStar Advisorwho can verify account informationand answer questions about thesystem.

Emergency

With Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in a crash even ifyou cannot ask for it.

Press] to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations.

OnStar SMS

When the Short Message Service(SMS) is received by the vehicle, apop-up screen with the message isdisplayed.

OnStar Welcome

When the user joins and operatesthe OnStar service for the first time,the pop-up screen “Get OnStarstarted now please push the bluebutton” is displayed.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.



. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list.See “Voice Pass-Thru” in thissection.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth-capable cellphone with a Hands-Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls.The infotainment system and voicerecognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m(30 ft). Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.


b / g (Push to Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and start voicerecognition.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Infotainment System Controls

If equipped, the infotainment systemallows certain controls to beselected on the infotainment display.

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑8.

5 / > (Phone): Press to enter thePhone main menu.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise. Donot point the center air vents directlyupward.



When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Use theO /VOL knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement(Canada) on page 13‑18 forinformation regarding Part 15 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules andIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑8.

Pairing Without Touchscreen

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability can be pairedseparately to the vehicle as aphone and an MP3 player at thesame time. This requires thedevice to be paired two times;once as a “hands-free” deviceand once as an MP3 device.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.



. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone as a Hands-FreeDevice


2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device(Hands-Free). A four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN) appears on the display.The PIN is used is Step 6.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.

6. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 4. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1−6 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on-screen prompts.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.







5. Select the new phone to link toand follow the on-screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.

Making a Call UsingPhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone's owner's guideor contact your wireless provider tofind out if this feature is supportedby your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.

The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your cellphone to make a call.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. Press 5 / > once or twice(depending on the radio).

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the MENU/TUNE buttonto scroll through the entire list ofnames/numbers in thephone book.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

Making a Call

To make a call:


2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑8.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/TUNE knob to accept the call.



Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/TUNE knob to decline the call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/TUNE knob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/TUNE knob to decline the call.

Switching Between Calls(Call Waiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn or press the MENU/TUNE knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three-waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn or press the MENU/TUNE knob.

2. Select Enter Number.

3. Enter the character sequencethen select Call. See “Entering aCharacter Sequence” inOperation on page 7‑8.

4. After the call has been placed,turn or press the MENU/TUNEknob and choose Merge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 1−4. The number of callers thatcan be added is limited by yourwireless service carrier.

Ending a Call

Turn or press the MENU/TUNEknob and select Hang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Turn or press the MENU/TUNEknob and select Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn or press the MENU/TUNEknob and select Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system.

1. Turn or press the MENU/TUNEknob and select Enter Number.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑8.



Pairing With Touchscreen

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStar®



capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.





. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

When the Bluetooth device andinfotainment system aresuccessfully paired, the phone bookis downloaded automatically.However, the phone book may notbe downloaded automaticallyaccording to the type of the phone.In this case, proceed with thephonebook download on phone.

Pairing a PhoneWhen there is no paired device onthe infotainment system and theSimple Secure Pairing (SSP) issupported:

1. PressD.

2. Press telephone, thenpress Yes.

3. Press Search Bluetooth Device.

4. Press the desired device to pairon the searched list screen.

5. Press Yes on the pop-up screenof the Bluetooth device andinfotainment system.

6. When the Bluetooth device andinfotainment system aresuccessfully paired, thetelephone screen is displayed onthe infotainment system.



Pairing a Phone

When a paired device is on theinfotainment system and the SSP issupported:

1. PressD.

2. Press settings.

3. Press connection settings.

4. Press bluetooth settings.

5. Press pair device.



8. Press Yes on the pop-up screenof the Bluetooth device andinfotainment system.

9. When the Bluetooth device andinfotainment system aresuccessfully paired, the 57is displayed on the "pair device"screen.

. The connected phone ishighlighted by 5.

. The 57 indicates thehands-free and phone musicfunction are enabled.

. The7 indicates onlyhands-free function is enabled.

. The 5 indicates only Bluetoothmusic is enabled.

Pairing a Phone

When there is no paired device onthe infotainment system and theSSP is not supported:

1. PressD.

2. Press telephone, thenpress Yes.



5. Input the PIN code (default:1234) to the Bluetooth device.When the Bluetooth device andinfotainment system aresuccessfully paired, thetelephone screen is displayed onthe infotainment system.

When the connection fails, a failuremessage is displayed on theinfotainment system.



If a Bluetooth device was previouslyconnected, the infotainment systemexecutes the auto connection.However, if the Bluetooth setting onthe Bluetooth device is turned off, afailure message is displayed on theinfotainment system.

Pairing a Phone

When a paired device is on theinfotainment system and the SSP isnot supported:

1. PressD.

2. Press settings.






8. Input the PIN code (default:1234) to the Bluetooth device.When the Bluetooth device andinfotainment system aresuccessfully paired, 57 isdisplayed on the pair devicescreen.

. The connected phone ishighlighted by 5.

. The 57 indicates thehands-free and phone musicfunction are enabled.

. The7 indicates onlyhands-free function is enabled.

. The 5 indicates only Bluetoothmusic is enabled.

Connecting a Bluetooth Device

1. PressD.

2. Select settings.




6. Press the device to be paired.

7. Press OK.

Checking the BluetoothConnection

1. PressD.

2. Select settings.




6. The paired device will showwith 57 when connected.



Disconnecting the BluetoothDevice

1. PressD.

2. Select settings.




6. Press the name of the device tobe disconnected.

7. Press OK.


1. PressD.

2. Select settings.




6. Press Delete.

7. Press Yes.

Bluetooth Music

Before playing Bluetooth music,read the follow information.. A cell phone or Bluetooth device

that supports Advanced AudioDistribution Profile (A2DP)versions over 1.2 must beregistered and connected to theproduct.

. From the cell phone or Bluetoothdevice, find the Bluetooth devicetype to set/connect the item as astereo headset.

. 5 will appear on the screen ifthe stereo headset issuccessfully connected.

. The sound played by theBluetooth device is deliveredthrough the infotainment system.

. Bluetooth music can be playedonly when a Bluetooth devicehas been connected. To playBluetooth music, connect theBluetooth phone to theinfotainment system.

. If the Bluetooth device isdisconnected while playingphone music, the music isdiscontinued. The audiostreaming function may not besupported in some Bluetoothphones. Only one function canbe used at a time between theBluetooth hands-free or Phonemusic function. For example,if you convert to the Bluetoothhands-free while playing Phonemusic, the music isdiscontinued. Playing music fromthe car is not possible whenthere are no music files stored inthe cell phone.

. For Bluetooth music to play, themusic must be played at leastonce from the music playermode of the cell phone orBluetooth device afterconnecting as a stereo headset.After being played at least once,the music player willautomatically play upon enteringplay mode, and it willautomatically stop when the



music player mode ends. If thecell phone or Bluetooth device isnot in the waiting screen mode,some devices may notautomatically play in Bluetoothmusic play mode.

Playing Bluetooth Music

1. PressD.

2. Press audio.

3. Press source R.

4. Press Bluetooth, then select theconnected Bluetooth musicplay mode.

Pause

Press r j to pause.

Press r j again to resume.

Skipping the Previous or Next File

Pressg orl to select theprevious or next file.

Search

Press and holdg orl to fastforward or rewind.

Playing a File Repeatedly

Pressv during playback.

. 1: Plays the current filerepeatedly.

. ALL: Plays all files repeatedly.

. OFF: Returns to normalplayback.

This function may not be supporteddepending on the cell phone.

Playing a File Randomly

Press u during playback.

. NO: Plays all files repeatedly.


This function may not be supporteddepending on the cell phone.

Do not change the track too quicklywhen playing Bluetooth music.

Conditions that may occur whenplaying Bluetooth music:. It takes some time to transmit

data from the cell phone to theinfotainment system.

. If the cell phone or Bluetoothdevice is not in the waitingscreen mode, it may notautomatically play despite beingcarried out from the Bluetoothmusic play mode.

. The infotainment systemtransmits the order to play fromthe cell phone in the Bluetoothmusic play mode. If this is done



in a different mode, then thedevice transmits the order tostop. Depending on the cellphone’s options, this order toplay/stop may take time toactivate.

. If the Bluetooth music playbackis not functioning, then check tosee if the cell phone is in thewaiting screen mode.

. Sounds may be cut off duringthe Bluetooth music playback.

. The infotainment system outputsthe audio from the cell phone orBluetooth device as it istransmitted.

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition)

Using Voice Recognition

To use voice recognition, press theb / g button located on the steeringwheel. Use the commands below forthe various voice features.

For additional information, say"Help" while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.


capability can be paired to thevehicle as a phone and an MP3player at the same time.





. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.



3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”


If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.



Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tags inthe Hands-Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.



To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling 911 Emergency Number


2. Say “Dial” or “Call”.”

3. Say “911.”

4. Say “Dial” or “Call”.”

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heard



followed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” Thesystem dials the last numbercalled from the connected cellphone.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Press $ /i to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Press $ /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press $ /i to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b / g , andthen say “Un-mute Call.”



Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, use

the audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see the



previous sections on deleting apaired phone and deletingname tags.

Hands-Free Phone

General Information WithTouchscreen

Vehicles with a Hands-Free Phonesystem can use a Bluetooth-capablecell phone with a hands-free profileto make and receive phone calls.The infotainment system and voicecontrol are used to operate the

system. Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the Hands-Free Phone system.

Hands-Free Phone Controls

Use the buttons on the infotainmentsystem and the steering wheel tooperate the Hands-Free Phonesystem.


Steering wheel controls can beused to:. Answer incoming calls.. Confirm system information.. End a call.. Decline a call.. Cancel an operation.. Make outgoing calls using the

call list.

b / g (Push to Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls and toconfirm system information. Pressand hold for two to three seconds toaccess the call list.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toend a call, decline a call, or cancelan operation.

Making a Call by Entering a PhoneNumber

1. Enter the phone number usingthe keypad on the telephonescreen.

2. Press 5 on the screen or b / gon the steering wheel controls.

If a wrong number is entered, press} to delete the number one digit ata time, or press and hold } todelete all digits of the number.



Switching a Call to the Cell Phone(Private Mode)

To switch the call from the cellphone to hands-free:

1. Press0.

2. Press0 again to switch back tohands-free.

Turning the Microphone Onand Off

Press3 to turn the microphone onor off.

Calling by Redial

To call by using redial:

. Press b / g on the steeringwheel controls to display theredial guidance screen.

. Press and hold 5 on thetelephone screen.

Redialing is not possible when thereis no call history.

Taking calls

When a phone call comes throughthe connected Bluetooth cell phone,the playing track will be cut off andthe phone will ring with the relevantinformation displayed.

Press b / g on the steering wheelcontrols or press Accept on thescreen.

To decline the call, press $ /i onthe steering wheel controls or pressReject on the screen.

Using the Phone Book Menu

1. Press Phone Book on thetelephone screen.

2. Press Q or R to scroll throughthe list.

3. Select the phone book entryto call.

4. Press the number to dial.

Searching for Phone Book Entries

1. Press Phone Book on thetelephone screen.

2. Press 9 on the phone bookscreen.

3. Use the keypad to input thename to search. For details,refer to the “Searching for aName” later in this section.


5. Press the number to dial.

When the Bluetooth device andinfotainment system aresuccessfully paired, the phone bookwill download. Some phones maynot download automatically. If thishappens, connect it again orproceed with the phone bookdownload on the phone.

Searching for a Name

Select characters by using thekeypad on the phone book screen.As characters are selected, thenames that include those characterswill display on the phone bookscreen. As more characters of thename are entered, the list ofpossible names is shortened.



To search for the name Alex:

1. Press (abc) to select the firstcharacter.

2. Press (jkl) to select the secondcharacter.

3. Press (def) to select the thirdcharacter.

4. Press (wxy) to select the fourthcharacter.

Making a Call from Call History

1. Press Call History on thetelephone screen.

2. Press one of the following for:

. 2 Dialed calls.

. 4 Missed calls.

. 9 Received calls.


Making a Call with Speed DialNumbers

Press and hold the speed dialnumber using the keypad on thetelephone screen.

Only speed dial numbers alreadystored on the cell phone can beused for speed dial calls. Up totwo-digit speed dial numbers aresupported.

For two-digit speed dial numbers,press and hold the second digit tomake a call to the speed dialnumber.

DownloadableApplications

Smartphone Link(Overview)Before Using Smartphone link

If equipped, the vehicle canconnect to Pandora® and StitcherSmartRadio™ through theinfotainment system. Theapplications most be downloaded tothe device first.

Pandora® is a free Internet radioservice that streams personalizedradio stations based on artists,songs, genres, and comedians.Create stations using the Pandorawebsite or smartphone application,then use - (thumbs up) or ,(thumbs down) to personalizestations. To set up an account, orfor more information, go towww.pandora.com. Pandora maynot be available in Canada orMexico.



Stitcher SmartRadio is an Internetradio service that streams news,sports, and entertainment showsthrough the audio system. Createpersonalized, on-demand stations ordiscover new shows throughStitcher's preset stations. To set upan account, download theapplication from the Android Marketor iTunes Store, or go towww.stitcher.com.

A phone or tablet with Internetconnection and the Pandora and/orStitcher application installed isrequired. Personal cell phone dataplans are used. Make sure the latestversion is installed on the deviceand the volume is turned up.

Supported SmartphoneApplications

Pandora. iPod®/iPhone®, through the USB

connection.. Android™ phone, through

Bluetooth® wireless.

. On a BlackBerry® phone,through Bluetooth wireless.

Stitcher. iPod/iPhone, through the USB

connection.. Android phone, through

Bluetooth wireless.

iPod/iPhone Error Messages andSolution

If the infotainment system fails toactivate the application on youriPod/iPhone connected through theUSB port, the error message isdisplayed as, “Unable to startapplication, possible reasons.”. Your iPhone is locked. To

resolve, unlock the iPhone.. You have another active

application open. To resolve,close the other activeapplication.

. You have not installed theapplication on your iPhone. Toresolve, install the application onthe iPhone.

iOS Version Error

If the iOS version of the iPhone isless than 4.0, the error message isdisplayed as, “Your iPhone doesnot allow this application to beopened on a USB connection.Please refer to owner’s manual.”. Activate the application on your

iPhone, then press the desiredapplication menu on theinfotainment system.

Connecting Application Error

If the infotainment system fails toactivate the application on thesmartphone connected throughBluetooth wireless technology, theerror message is displayed as,“Connecting application error.”. Reset all settings related to the

phone, then press the desiredapplication menu on theinfotainment system.

. Reconnect the smartphone andInfotainment system throughBluetooth wireless technology,



then press the desiredapplication menu on theinfotainment system.

. When the application is stoppedon the smartphone, it usuallytakes time to return to normaloperation. Try to activate theapplication after 10–20 seconds.

To switch between Stitcher orPandora while playing the other onthe iPod/iPhone connected throughthe USB port, press theD button ofthe iPod/iPhone, then press Stitcheror Pandora on the smartphone linkmenu of the infotainment system.

Switching Between a USBConnected Device and aBluetooth Device

When the iPhone is connected tothe infotainment system through theUSB port, and the infotainmentsystem is connected to anotherphone through Bluetooth wirelesstechnology, it is possible to switchbetween the two applications, usingthe smartphone list menu.

. Press iPhone or bluetooth phoneon the smartphone list menu toswitch to the desired device.

Displaying or Hiding ApplicationIcons

To display or hide application iconson the smartphone link menu:

1. PressD.

2. Press smartphone link.

3. Press SETTINGS.

4. Press the desired applicationicon to hide or display it on thesmartphone link screen.

5. Press OK.

If the activated application is on thesmartphone link menu, the ^ isactivated in the upper position of theHOME menu or playing screen.

Smartphone Link(Pandora)Some images and explanations mayvary by phone operating systems,versions, and/or application (App)versions.

Using Pandora®

1. Install the Pandora applicationon the smartphone.

2. Connect the smartphone to theinfotainment system through theUSB port or Bluetooth wirelesstechnology.. iPhone: USB connection. Android phone/BlackBerry

phone: Bluetooth wirelesstechnology

3. Activate the Pandora application.

4. PressD.




6. Press Pandora.

7. Press Pandora.

If the smartphone is not connectedto the infotainment system or theapplication is not installed on thesmartphone, the Pandora menu isnot activated.

Thumbs Up and Thumbs Down

Rate tracks by using - (thumbs up)

or , (thumbs down).

Pause

. Press j to pause.

. Press r to resume.

Changing Tracks

Pressl to change to the nexttrack.

Bookmark

To bookmark a favorite artist ortrack.

1. Press S on the screen.

2. Press Artist or Track.

Pandora Menus

Creating Stations from CurrentlyPlaying Music

1. Press MENU. The Pandoramenu is displayed.

2. Press create station.

3. Press from currently playing.

4. Press Artist or Track.

5. Press the desired station.The station is added into thePandora menu automatically.

Creating Stations by Searchingby Artist or Track


2. Press create station.

3. Press enter artist/track.The keypad is displayed.

4. Enter the artist or track nameusing the keypad, and thenpress Create.

5. Press the desired station.The station is added into thePandora menu automatically.

Listening to Stations


2. Press Q or R to scroll throughthe list. Select the desiredstation.



QuickMix


2. Press QuickMixZ to listen to aselection of tracks from yourstations.

Tone Settings


2. Press tone settings. The tonesettings menu is displayed. See“Tone Settings” under “RadioControls With Touchscreen” inOperation on page 7‑8.

Smartphone Link(Stitcher)Some images and explanations mayvary by phone operating systems,versions, and/or application (App)versions.

Using Stitcher™

1. Install the Stitcher application onthe smartphone.

2. Connect the smartphone to theinfotainment system through theUSB port or Bluetooth wirelesstechnology.. iPhone: USB connection. Android phone/BlackBerry

phone: Bluetooth wirelesstechnology

3. Activate the Stitcher application.

4. PressD.


6. Press Stitcher.

7. Press Stitcher.

If the smartphone is not connectedto the infotainment system or theapplication is not installed on thesmartphone. The Stitcher menu isnot activated.

Thumbs Up and Thumbs Down

Rate tracks by using - (thumbs up)

or , (thumbs down).

Pause

. Press j to pause.


Changing Stations

Pressl to change to the nextstation.

Saving Favorites

To save a station as a favorite,press q on the stitcher screen.



Stitcher Menus

The Stitcher Station menu displaysavailable station data from theStitcher server.

1. Press MENU. The StitcherStation menu is displayed.

2. Press Q or R to scroll throughthe list. Select the desiredstation.

Tone Settings

1. Press MENU. The Stitcher menuis displayed.

2. Press tone settings. The tonesettings menu is displayed. See“Tone Settings” under “RadioControls With Touchscreen” inOperation on page 7‑8.

Bluetooth Phone/Devices

Pictures and Movies(Audio System)The infotainment system can playthe music files contained in the USBstorage device or iPod/iPhoneproducts.

Audio System Information

Using MP3/WMA/OGG/WAV Files. Music files with .mp3, .wma,

.ogg, and .wav file nameextensions can be played.

. MP3 files that can be played are:Bit rate: 8 kbps ~ 320 kbps -Sampling frequency: 48 kHz,44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 24 kHz,22.05 kHz, and 16 kHz.

. Files with a bit rate above128 kbps will result in higherquality sound.

. ID3 Tag information for MP3files, such as the album nameand the artist, can be played.

. To display album title, track title,and artist information, the fileshould be compatible with theID3 Tag V1 and V2 formats.

Using USB Storage Devices andiPod/iPhone. Use a USB or flash memory type

storage device. Do not connectusing a USB adaptor.

. Do not connect and reconnectthe USB device repeatedly in ashort time, as this may causestatic electricity and problemsusing the device.

. Use a USB device with a metalconnecting terminal.

. Connection with i-Stick TypeUSB storage devices may befaulty due to vehicle vibration.

. Do not to touch the USBconnecting terminal.



. Only USB storage devicesformatted in FAT16/32, exFATfile system are recognized.NTFS and other file systems arenot recognized.

. The time it takes to process fileswill depend on the USB storagedevice type and capacity, andthe type of files stored.

. Some USB storage device filesmay not be compatible.

. Up to two USB devices and oneiPod can be played through aUSB hub. All devices may not besupported, depending on theperformance of the USB hub.If there is not enough powersupply, it may not operatenormally.

. Do not disconnect the USBstorage device while it is playing.This may cause damage to theproduct or affect theperformance of the USB device.

. Disconnect the USB storagedevice when the ignition isturned off. If the ignition is turned

on while the USB device isconnected, the USB device maybe damaged or may not operatenormally.

. USB storage devices can onlybe connected for playing music/movies, viewing photo files,or upgrading.

. Do not use the USB terminal tocharge USB accessoryequipment. The heat generatedmay cause performance issuesor damage.

. Store files in the top-level driveof the USB storage device.When the logical drive isseparated from the device, onlythe USB music files from thetop-level logical drive can beplayed. Music files stored onUSB storage devices may notplay normally if an application isloaded by partitioning a separatedrive.

. Music files to which Digital RightManagement (DRM) is appliedcannot be played.

. USB storage device capacitylimit is 2,500 music files,2500 photo files, 250 movie files,2,500 folders, and 10 stages offolder structure. The iPod/iPhonecan play all music filessupported, but will only displayup to 2,500 files on the screen inalphabetical order.

. The following iPod/iPhoneproduct models are supported:

‐ iPod 2G nano®/iPod 3G nano/iPod 4G and 5G nano

‐ iPod 120GB and 160GBclassic®

‐ iPod 1G, 2G, and 3G touch®

‐ iPhone 3G and 3GS

‐ iPhone 4/4S. Only connect the iPod/iPhone

with connection cablessupported by iPod/iPhoneproducts. Other connectioncables cannot be used.



. The iPod/iPhone may bedamaged if the ignition is turnedoff when it is connected to thevehicle. When not in use,disconnect the iPod/iPhone.

. When the iPod/iPhone isconnected to the USB port byusing the iPod/iPhone cable, theBluetooth music is notsupported.

. Connect the iPod/iPhone to theUSB port by using the iPod/iPhone cable to play the musicfiles. When the iPod/iPhone isconnected to the AUX inputterminal, the music file willnot play.

. The iPod/iPhone playbackfunctions and the informationdisplayed may be different whenplayed on the infotainmentsystem.

. Refer to the table for theclassification items related to thesearch function provided by theiPod/iPhone.

USB Player

Playing Music from a USB Device. Connect the USB device to the

USB port.. Play will start automatically after

the system has finished readingthe USB device.

. If a non-readable USB device isconnected, an error messagedisplays and the system willswitch to the previous audiofunction.

If the USB device is alreadyconnected:

. PressD.

. Press audio.

. Press SourceR.

. Press USB.

To stop the USB device and selectanother media source, pressSourceR, then select the othersource.

To remove the USB device, selectanother function, then remove theUSB device.



Pause

. Press j to pause.


Changing to Next/Previous Files

. Pressl to change to thenext file.

. Pressg within five seconds ofthe playback time to play theprevious file.

Returning to the Beginning of theCurrent File

Pressg after five seconds of theplayback time.

Scanning Forward or Backward

Press and holdg orl duringplayback to rewind or fast forward.Release the button to resumeplayback at normal speed.







Pressu during playback.

. NO: Plays all files randomly.


Viewing Information on theCurrently Playing File

Press the title during playback todisplay information about the currentfile playing.. The information displayed

includes the title, file name,folder name, and artist/albumsaved with the song.

. Incorrect information cannot bemodified or corrected on theinfotainment system.

. The information for songsexpressed in special symbols orin unavailable languages may bedisplayed as “u.”

Using the USB Music Menu. Press MENU during playback.

. Press the play mode.



Tone Settings

1. Press R.

2. Press tone settings. The ToneSettings menu is displayed. See“Tone Settings” under “RadioControls with Touchscreen” inOperation on page 7‑8.

iPod/iPhone player

This feature is limited to modelssupporting the iPod/iPhoneconnection.

Playing Music Files. Connect the iPod/iPhone to the

USB port.. Play will start from the previously

played point after the systemhas finished reading the USBdevice.

. If a non-readable USB device isconnected, an error messagedisplays and the system willswitch to the previous audiofunction.

If the iPod/iPhone is alreadyconnected:

. PressD.

. Press audio.

. Press SourceR.

. Press iPod.

To stop the device and selectanother media source, pressSourceR, then select the othersource.

To remove the device, selectanother function, then remove thedevice.

Pause

. Press j to pause.


Changing to Next/Previous Song

. Pressl to change to thenext song.

. Pressg within two seconds ofthe playback time to play theprevious file.

Returning to the Beginning of theCurrent File

Pressg after two seconds of theplayback time.


Press and holdg orl duringplayback to rewind or fast-forward.Release the button to resumeplayback at normal speed.









Pressu during playback.

. NO: Plays all files randomly.


Viewing Information on theCurrently Playing Song

Press the title during playback todisplay information about the currentsong playing.. The information displayed

includes the title, file name,folder name, and artist/albumsaved with the song.

. Incorrect information cannot bemodified or corrected on theinfotainment system.

. The information for songsexpressed in special symbols orin unavailable languages may bedisplayed as “u.”

Using the iPod Menu. Press MENU during playback.. Press the appropriate

play mode.

Tone Settings

1. Press R on the iPod menu.

2. Press tone settings. The tonesettings menu is displayed. See“Tone Settings” under “RadioControls with Touchscreen” inOperation on page 7‑8.

Pictures and Movies(Picture System)The Infotainment system can viewpicture files that are stored on aUSB device.

Picture System Information

Caution For Using Picture Files. File size:

‐ JPG: Within 64 to5,000 pixels (Width) and64 to 5,000 pixels (Height).

‐ BMP, PNG, GIF: Within 64 to1,024 pixels (Width) and 64 to1,024 pixels (Height).

. File extensions: .jpg, .bmp, .png,.gif. Animated .gif files are notsupported.

. Some files may not operate dueto a different recording format orthe condition of file.



Viewing Pictures

1. Connect the USB device to theUSB port.

2. Press the screen to open to fullscreen. Press the screen againto return to the previous screen.


1. PressD.

2. Press picture & movie.

3. Press SourceR.

4. Press USB picture.

Some features are disabled whilethe vehicle is in motion.

Viewing Slide Show

From the picture screen, press z.

. The slide show will start to play.

. Press the screen to cancel theslide show during the slide showplayback.

Viewing a Previous or NextPicture

Presst oru from the picturescreen.

Rotating a Picture

Press y or w from the picturescreen.

Enlarging a Picture

Pressx from the picture screen.

Using the USB Picture Menu

1. Press MENU from the picturescreen.

2. Press the appropriate menu:. picture file list: lists all

picture files.. sort by title: shows pictures

in title order.. sort by date: shows pictures

in date order.. slide show time: allows

selection of the slide showinterval.

. clock/temp display: allowsselection of On or Off toshow the clock andtemperature on the fullscreen.

. display setting: adjusts forBrightness and Contrast.



3. Press4 to exit.

Pictures and Movies(Movie System)The infotainment system can playmovie files that are stored on aUSB device.

Movie System Information

Caution For Using Movie Files. Available resolution:

Within 720 x 576 (W x H) pixels.. Frame rate: Less than 30 fps.. Playable movie file: .avi, .mpg,

.mp4, .divx, .xvid, .wmv. Theplayable movie file may not beplayed according to the codecformat.

. Playable Codec format:divx, xvid, mpeg-1,mpeg-4 (mpg4, mp42, mp43),wmv9 (wmv3).

. Playable Audio format: MP3,AC3, AAC, WMA.

. Max Video Bitrate:

‐ mpeg-1: 8Mbps

‐ mpeg-4 (mpg4, mp42, mp43):4Mbps

‐ wmv9: 3 Mbps

‐ divx 3: 3 Mbps

‐ divx 4/5/6: 4.8 Mbps

‐ xvid: 4.5 Mbps. Max Audio Bitrate:

‐ mp3: 320 Kbps

‐ wma: 320 Kbps

‐ ac-3: 640 Kbps

‐ aac: 449 Kbps. Movie files to which Digital Right

Management (DRM) is appliedmay not be played.

Playing a Movie File

1. Connect the USB device to theUSB port.

2. Press the screen to open to fullscreen. Press the screen againto return to the previous screen.


1. PressD.

2. Press picture & movie.

3. Press SourceR.

4. Press USB movie.

Movie is not available while driving.

Viewing Slide Show

From the picture screen, press z.

. The slide show will start to play.

. Press the screen to cancel theslide show during the slide showplayback.

. The last played audio source willplay as background musicduring the slide show playback.

Pause

. Press j to pause.




Changing to Next/Previous Movie

. Pressu to change to thenext file.

. Presst within five seconds ofthe playback time to play theprevious file.

Returning to the Beginning of theCurrent Movie

Presst after five seconds of theplayback time.


Press and holdt oru duringplayback to rewind or fast-forward.Release the button to resumeplayback at normal speed.

Viewing Full Screen

Presst from the movie screen.

Presst again to return to theprevious screen.

Using the USB Movie Menu

1. Press MENU from the moviescreen.

2. Press the appropriate menu:. movie file list: lists all movie

files.. clock/temp display: allows

selection of On or Off toshow the clock andtemperature on the fullscreen.

. display settings: adjusts forBrightness and Contrast.

. tone settings: shows thesound setup. See “ToneSettings” under “RadioControls with Touchscreen”in Operation on page 7‑8.

3. Press4 to exit.

Subtitle Language

If the movie file has a subtitlelanguage, it can be viewed.

. Press q from the movie screen.

. Press S or T on the pop-upscreen.

. Press r to close the pop-upscreen.

If there is only one subtitlelanguage, it can be set to On/Off.

Audio Language

If the movie file has an audiolanguage, it can be used.

. Press q from the movie screen.

. PressZ S or T on the pop-upscreen.

. Press r to close the pop-upscreen.

If there is only one audio language,it cannot be set. Audio languagecan be set only when the movie fileis the Divx File.



Trademarks andLicense AgreementsFCC Information

See Radio Frequency Statement(Canada) on page 13‑18 regardingPart 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth word mark and logosare owned by the Bluetooth® SIG,Inc. and any use of such marks byGeneral Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

DivX Certified® to play DivX® video,including premium content.

Covered by one or more of thefollowing U.S. patents: 7,295,673;7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274.

DivX®, DivX Certified® andassociated logos are trademarks ofRovi Corporation or its subsidiariesand are used under license.

“Made for iPod” and “Made foriPhone” mean that an electronicaccessory has been designed toconnect specifically to iPod oriPhone and has been certified bythe developer to meet Appleperformance standards.

iPod and iPhone are trademarks ofApple Computer, Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.

Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee,taxes, one time activation fee, andother fees may apply. Subscriptionfee is consumer only. All fees andprogramming subject to change.Subscriptions subject to CustomerAgreement available atwww.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM®

service only available in the48 contiguous United States andCanada.

In Canada: Some deterioration ofservice may occur in extremenorthern latitudes. This is beyondthe control of SiriusXM® SatelliteRadio.



Explicit Language Notice: Channelswith frequent explicit language areindicated with an “XL” preceding thechannel name. Channel blocking isavailable for SiriusXM SatelliteRadio receivers by notifyingSiriusXM:. USA: 866-635-2349 or see

www.siriusxm.com.. Canada: 877-209-0079 or

see www.xmradio.ca.

It is prohibited to copy, decompile,disassemble, reverse engineer,hack, manipulate, or otherwisemake available any technology orsoftware incorporated in receiverscompatible with the SiriusXMSatellite Radio System or thatsupport the SiriusXM website, theOnline Service or any of its content.

Furthermore, the AMBER voicecompression software included inthis product is protected byintellectual property rights includingpatent rights, copyrights, and tradesecrets of Digital VoiceSystems, Inc.

General Requirements:

1. A License Agreement fromSiriusXM is required for anyproduct that incorporatesSiriusXM Technology and/or foruse of any of the SiriusXMmarks to be manufactured,distributed, or marketed in theSiriusXM Service Area.

2. For products to be distributed,marketed, and/or sold inCanada, a separate agreementis required with CanadianSatellite Radio Inc. (operating asXM Canada).

FreeType 2

Portions of this software arecopyright

®2007-2012 The

FreeType Project(www.freetype.org).All rights reserved.

Libjpeg

The navigation software is based inpart on the work of the independentJPEG Group.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

MaintenanceAir Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Climate ControlSystemsFor vehicles with these climatecontrol systems, the heating,cooling, and ventilation can becontrolled for the vehicle.

Climate Control System withHeater and Air Conditioning


2. Fan Control


4. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats

5. Air Conditioning


7. Recirculation

Climate Control System withHeater Only


2. Fan Control




8-2 Climate Controls

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature.

A (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turning thefan control to 0 turns the fan off. Thefan must be turned on to run the airconditioning compressor.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

Select from the following air deliverymodes:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some air directedto the rear outlets.

W (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the floor, windshield, andside window outlets.

1 (Defrost): This mode clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

In defrost or defog mode, excessiveair conditioning use can cause thewindows to fog. If this happens,change the air delivery mode toYand reduce the fan speed.

# (Air Conditioning): Forvehicles with air conditioning, followthese steps to use the system. TurnA to the desired speed. The airconditioning does not operate whenthe fan control knob is in the offposition. Press# to turn the air

conditioning on and off. When# ispressed, an indicator light comes onto show that the air conditioningis on.

For quick cool down on hot days, dothe following:

1. Open the windows to let hot airescape.

2. PressM.

3. Press#.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highestA speed.

Using these settings together forlong periods of time may cause theair inside the vehicle to become toodry. To prevent this from happening,after the air in the vehicle hascooled, turn the recirculationmode off.

M (Recirculation): This moderecirculates and helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle. It canbe used to prevent outside air andodors from entering the vehicle.



Press the button to turn therecirculation mode on. An indicatorlight comes on to show that therecirculation is on. Press the buttonagain to return to outside air mode.

Using the recirculation mode forextended periods may cause thewindows to fog. If this happens,select the defrost mode.

M / L (Heated Seats, IfEquipped): Press to heat the driveror passenger seat. See HeatedFront Seats on page 3‑7.

Rear Window and OutsideMirror Defogger

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear window andoutside mirror defogger on or off.An indicator light comes on to showthat the feature is on.

The rear window defogger turns offafter about 10 minutes. It can alsobe turned off by pressing1 againor by turning the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.If turned on again it runs for aboutfive minutes before turning off.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on withthe rear window defogger and helpto clear fog or frost from the surfaceof the mirror. See Heated Mirrors onpage 2‑12.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal, or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.



Air Vents

Use the air vents in the center andon the side of the instrument panelto direct the airflow. Move the slatson the center air vents to directairflow.

Turn the knobs on the side air ventscounterclockwise or clockwise toopen or close off the airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside thevehicle more effectively.



Maintenance

Air IntakeClear away any ice, snow, or leavesfrom the air intake at the base of thewindshield that can block the flow ofair into the vehicle.

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3. To find out what type offilter to use, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑15.

1. Open the glove box completelyand pull it to remove.

2. Remove the filter cover byunscrewing both sides of thecover.

3. Install the new air filter.

4. Reinstall the air filter cover andglove box in reverse order.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-23Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-26

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-29

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-31Descent ControlSystem (DCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34


9-2 Driving and Operating

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-36Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-40Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-40California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-41Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑13.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to be

careless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second.In that time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.



Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

If the vehicle has electric powersteering, it does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel, and isheld in that position for an extendedperiod of time, power steering assistmay be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

Hydraulic Power Steering

If the vehicle has the hydraulicpower steering, it may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid (1.4L L4 Engine) onpage 10‑20 or Power Steering Fluid(1.8L L4 Engine) on page 10‑20.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or asystem malfunctions, the vehiclecan be steered but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve.. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.



Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid —

too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.



Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑40.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.



. Keep your eyes moving — scanthe road ahead and to the sides.

. Check the rearview mirror andvehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or even

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill.Steering may also be affectedwhen ignition is off. You couldcrash. Always have the enginerunning and the vehicle in gearwhen going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.



Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9‑28.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program (Canada) onpage 13‑5 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑7. Toget help and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) which

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

cannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speed

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

to the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑22.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑30.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑71.



Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry: the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle center

pillar (B-pillar). With the driverdoor open, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑40 andTire Pressure on page 10‑48.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle Weight



Rating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle; see “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).



Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel, found on the vehiclecenter pillar (B-pillar), tells youthe gross weight capacity of thevehicle, called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). TheGVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel,



and cargo. Never exceed theGVWR for the vehicle, or theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

And, if you do have a heavyload, you should spread it out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

If you put things inside thevehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else —they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN and the regularbrake pedal applied.

1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.

This position locks the steeringwheel, ignition, and transmission.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.



2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑29.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is theposition in which you can operatethings like the radio and thewindshield wipers when the engineis off.

3 (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

4 (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the ignition.If the ignition becomes difficult toturn, see Keys on page 2‑1.



Key Lock Release

Vehicles with an automatictransmission may be equipped withan electronic key lock releasesystem. This system is to preventignition key removal unless the shiftlever is in P (Park).

The key lock release will not work ifthe battery is charged less than9-volts, or uncharged. Try chargingor jump starting the battery. SeeJump Starting on page 10‑68

If charging or jump starting thebattery does not work, there is amanual key lock release. Locate thehole below the ignition lock. Insert atool or key into the opening. Locatethe lever, and press it toward thedriver while removing the key fromthe ignition.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in theproper gear.

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Notice: If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.

Any resulting damage would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑44.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be in Neutraland the parking brake engaged.Hold the clutch pedal down to thefloor and start the engine. Thevehicle will not start if the clutchpedal is not all the way down.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the ignition.

The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists in



starting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain the

battery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key or button, andthe accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline fromthe engine. Do not race theengine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Engine HeaterVehicles with the 1.4L engine mayhave an engine heater. The engineheater can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the heater at least four hoursbefore starting the vehicle. Aninternal thermostat in the plug-endof the cord will prevent engineheater operation at temperaturesabove −18°C (0°F).



To Use The Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

3. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord islocated in the driver side of theengine compartment, near thebattery. It is shipped from thefactory with a tie holding it inplace. Use care in removing thetie so that the cord is notdamaged.

4. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

5. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof

The power windows and sunroof willcontinue to work for up to10 minutes or until any door isopened. The radio will work whenthe key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the radio will continue to work for10 minutes, or until the driver door isopened.

Shifting Into Park1. Hold the brake pedal down and

set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑29.



2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pressing the button on theshift lever and pushing the leverall the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running (AutomaticTransmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑18.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), hold thebrake pedal down. Then see if youcan move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pushing thebutton on the shift lever. If you can,it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock (AutomaticTransmission)

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift your transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficultto pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift intoP (Park) properly before you leavethe driver seat. To find out how, see“Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission)” in this section.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pullthe shift lever out of P (Park).



Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with a shiftlock control. The shift lock control isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park) unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock control is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑68.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If still unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If the shift lever still cannot bemoved from P (Park), see “ShiftLock Manual Release.”

Shift Lock Manual Release

The automatic transmission has anelectric park lock. The key must bein the ON/RUN position, and thebrake pedal pressed so the shiftlever can be moved from theP (Park) position. If the battery haslost power, the shift lever cannot bemoved from P (Park) unless the shiftlock manual release is disengagedmanually.

To access the shift lock manualrelease:

1. Turn the ignition OFF andremove the key.

2. Hold the brake pedal down.Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the cover on theconsole.



4. Insert and press the ignition keyinto the slot.

5. Move the shift lever out ofP (Park). If P (Park) is selectedagain after the key is removedfrom the slot, the shift lever willbe locked again.

6. Remove the key from the slot.

7. Close the cover.

8. Have the cause of the problemfixed by your dealer.

ParkingIf the vehicle has a manualtransmission, before getting out ofthe vehicle, move the shift lever intoR (Reverse) if parking on a downhillslope. On a level surface or anuphill slope, use 1 (First) gear.Firmly apply the parking brake. Turnthe wheels toward the curb for adownhill slope, or away from thecurb for an uphill slope. Once theshift lever has been placed into gearwith the clutch pedal pressed in,turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,remove the key, and release theclutch.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.



Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9‑18and Engine Exhaust on page 9‑22.If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, see Parking onpage 9‑21.



AutomaticTransmission

The selected gear is also shown inthe instrument cluster.

P (Park): This position locks thedrive wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑18.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brake must befully applied first and then the shift

lever button pressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park onpage 9‑20.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9.



N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

The vehicle has an automaticneutral shift feature which allows thetransmission to automatically shift toN (Neutral) when the vehicle isstopped with a forward gearengaged. The reduced load on theengine improves vehicle fueleconomy.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If more power isneeded for passing, and thevehicle is:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

M (Manual Mode): This positionallows shifting similar to a manualtransmission. See Manual Mode onpage 9‑25.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away.



Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward toM (Manual).

While driving in manual mode,the transmission will remain inthe driver selected gear. Whencoming to a stop in the manualposition, the vehicle willautomatically shift into1 (First) gear.

2. Press the + (plus) end of thebutton on the side of the shiftlever to upshift, or push the −(minus) end of the button todownshift.

The instrument cluster will changefrom the currently displayedmessage to the letter “M,” forManual position, and a numberindicating the requested gear.

While using the DSC feature, thetransmission will have firmer shiftingand sportier performance. This canbe used for sport driving or whenclimbing hills to stay in gear longeror to downshift for more power orengine braking.

The transmission will only allow youto shift into gears appropriate for thevehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm):. The transmission will not allow

shifting to the next higher gear ifthe vehicle speed or engine rpmis too low.

. The transmission will not allowshifting to the next lower gear ifthe vehicle speed or engine rpmis too high.



Manual TransmissionThe vehicle may be equipped with afive-speed or six-speed manualtransmission.

Notice: Do not rest your hand onthe shift lever while driving. Thepressure could cause prematurewear in the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Notice: Do not rest your foot onthe clutch pedal while driving orwhile stopped. The pressure cancause premature wear in theclutch. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Shifting the vehicleinitially into any gear other than1 (First) or R (Reverse) candamage the clutch. Shift themanual transmission in theproper sequence, and time thegear shifting with the acceleratorto avoid revving the engine anddamaging the clutch.

1 (First): Press the clutch pedalfully to the pedal stop and shift into1 (First). Then slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

You can shift into 1 (First) whengoing less than 32 km/h (20 mph).If you have come to a complete stopand it is hard to shift into 1 (First),put the shift lever in Neutral and letup on the clutch. Press the clutchpedal back down. Then shift into1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth)(if equipped) the same way as for2 (Second). Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to Neutral.

Neutral: Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine. Theshift lever is in Neutral when it iscentered in the shift pattern, not inany gear.

R (Reverse): To engage reverse,with the vehicle stationary, pull upon the button on the selector leverand engage the gear. If the gear



does not engage, set the lever inneutral, release the clutch pedal andapply it again; then repeat gearselection.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

Shift Speeds

{ WARNING

If you skip a gear when youdownshift, you could lose controlof the vehicle. You could injureyourself or others. Do not shiftdown more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

Up-Shift Light

Vehicles equipped with a manualtransmission may have an up-shiftlight. This light indicates when toshift to the next higher gear forbetter fuel economy.

For the best fuel economy,accelerate slowly and shift when thelight comes on, and if the weather,road, and traffic conditions allow.

It is normal for the light to go on andoff if the accelerator positionchanges quickly. Ignore the lightduring downshifts.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has active on demandAll-Wheel Drive (AWD), the AWDsystem operates automaticallywithout any action required by thedriver. If the front drive wheels beginto slip, the rear wheels willautomatically begin to drive thevehicle as required. There may be aslight engagement noise during harduse but this is normal.

The vehicle may display a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message.The message indicates that there isa malfunction in the AWD system.If this happens, the vehicle shouldbe serviced. When TCS/StabiliTrak®

is activated on icy or slippery roads,AWD may be deactivated. This isnot displayed in the DIC. SeeVehicle Messages on page 5‑27.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑17.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down and pull up on theparking brake lever. If the ignition ison, the brake system warning lightwill come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑16.

To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down. Pull theparking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold therelease button in as you move thebrake lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.

Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After the drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill on agrade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated.



During the transition period betweenwhen the driver releases the brakepedal and starts to accelerate todrive off on a grade, HSA holds thebraking pressure to ensure thatthere is no rolling. The brakes willautomatically release when theaccelerator pedal is applied withinthe two-second window. It will notactivate if the vehicle is in a drivegear and facing downhill, or if thevehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin.On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, thesystem operates if it senses thatone or both of the front wheels arespinning or beginning to losetraction. On an All-Wheel-Drive(AWD) vehicle, the system willoperate if it senses that any of thewheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. When this happens,the system brakes the spinningwheel(s), and/or reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

TCS is on whenever the vehicle isstarted. To limit wheel spin,especially in slippery road

conditions, the system shouldalways be left on. But, TCS can beturned off if needed.

TCS/StabiliTrak Light

d flashes to indicate that thetraction control system is active.

If there is a problem detected withTCS, d comes on and stays on, thevehicle is safe to drive but thesystem is not operational. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.



If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mph), seeyour dealer for service.

A chime may also sound when thelight comes on steady.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brakeor accelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle's driveline couldbe damaged.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button

g is on the center stack.

TCS Off Light

TCS can be turned off by pressingand releasing g. When TCS is

turned off, i comes on and thesystem will not limit wheel spin.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly. Press and release gagain to turn the system back on.

It may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud, or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See If theVehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9 formore information. See also WinterDriving on page 9‑7 for informationon using TCS when driving in snowyor icy conditions.

If cruise control is being used whenTCS activates, cruise control willautomatically disengage.

Press the cruise control button toreengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑34.

Adding non-GM accessories canaffect the vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a differencebetween the intended path, and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to help steerthe vehicle in the intended direction.



StabiliTrak is on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. Toassist with directional control of thevehicle, the system should alwaysbe left on.

TCS/StabiliTrak Light

When the stability control systemactivates, d flashes on in theinstrument cluster. This also occurswhen traction control is activated.A noise may be heard or vibrationmay be felt in the brake pedal. Thisis normal. Continue to steer thevehicle in the intended direction.

If there is a problem detected withStabiliTrak, d comes on and stayson. The vehicle is safe to drive, butthe system is not operational.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mph), seeyour dealer for service.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button

g is on the center stack.

StabiliTrak OffLight

TCS Off Light

StabiliTrak can be turned off ifneeded by pressing and holding guntil g and i come on in theinstrument cluster. When StabiliTrakis turned off, the system will notassist with directional control of thevehicle or limit wheel spin. TCS willalso be turned off. Driving should beadjusted accordingly. Press andrelease g again to turn bothsystems back on.

StabiliTrak will automatically turnback on when the vehicle speedexceeds 50 km/h (31 mph).



If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, cruise controlwill automatically disengage. Pressthe cruise control button toreengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑34.

Descent ControlSystem (DCS)The Descent Control System (DCS)allows the vehicle to travel at a lowspeed without applying the brake.

The vehicle will automaticallydecelerate to a low speed andremain there when DCS isturned on.

Use only when descending steepgrades while driving off-road. Do notuse when driving on normal roadsurfaces.

Turn the system on by pressing theDCS button located on the centerstack. The green DCS light comeson steady in the instrument clusterwhen the system is on.

The green DCS light flashes on theinstrument cluster while driving atspeeds below 35 km/h (22 mph) toshow the system is operating.

DCS will not activate at speedsabove 35 km/h (22 mph), even if thebutton is pressed.

Notice. DCS is designed for drivingdown steep off-road hills.

. Unnecessary use of DCS cancause malfunctions in thebrake system or StabiliTrak.

. Some noise or vibration fromthe brake system may beheard or felt when DCS isactive. This is normal.

To turn the system off, press theDCS button again and the DCS lightturns off. Applying the brake oraccelerator will also cause DCS toturn off.



Cruise ControlFor vehicles with cruise control, thevehicle can maintain a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or morewithout keeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below 40 km/h(25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol shuts off.

If the vehicle's Traction ControlSystem (TCS) or StabiliTrak systembegins to limit wheel spin whileusing cruise control, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑30 or StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑31. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, thecruise control can be turnedback on.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads. 1 (On/Off): Press to turn the

cruise control system on and off.

RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):Move the thumbwheel up to resumea previously set speed or toaccelerate.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down to set a speed orto make the vehicle decelerate.

* (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.



Setting Cruise Control

If 1 is on when not in use, it couldget bumped and go into cruise whennot desired. Keep 1 off when cruisecontrol is not being used.

To set cruise control:

1. Press 1.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel down toSET/- and release it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesor clutch for manual transmissionsare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+

briefly. The vehicle returns to thespeed selected previously andstays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase the speed in smallamounts, move the thumbwheelup toward RES/+ briefly andthen release it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in small amounts,move the thumbwheel towardSET/− briefly. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to the previousset cruise control speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well cruise control works onhills depends on the vehicle speed,load, and the steepness of the hills.When going up steep hills, youmight have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle speed. When the brakes areapplied, cruise control isdisengaged.



Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal orclutch for manual transmission.

. Press* on the steering wheel.

. To turn off cruise control, press1 on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if the 1 buttonis pressed or if the ignition isturned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it assists the driver with parking andavoiding objects while inR (Reverse). URPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),and the sensors on the rear bumperdetect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle, and at least20 cm (8 in) off the ground.

{ WARNING

The URPA system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicle

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

damage, even with URPA, alwayscheck the area around the vehicleand check all mirrors beforebacking.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse).

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than40 cm (16 in) the beeping is acontinuous tone for five seconds.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 20 cm (8 in) off the ground andbelow liftgate level. Objects mustalso be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the



rear bumper. The distance objectscan be detected may be less duringwarmer or humid weather.

Turning the System On and Off

The URPA system can be turned onand off using the infotainmentsystem controls. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑27 formore information.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

This light may come on for thefollowing reasons:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑74.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The light may not clearuntil the frost or ice has melted.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or an object washanging out of the liftgate duringthe last drive cycle. Once theobject is removed, URPA willreturn to normal operation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The bumper is damaged. Takethe vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.

If the above conditions do not exist,take the vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have an RVCsystem. Read this entire sectionbefore using it.

The RVC can assist the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle.

{ WARNING

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectlocated outside the camera's fieldof view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Perceiveddistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not back thevehicle using only the RVCscreen, during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers,or where there could becross traffic.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Failure to use proper care beforebacking may result in injury,death, or vehicle damage. Alwayscheck behind and around thevehicle before backing.

An image appears on the radioscreen with the message CheckSurroundings for Safety when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).The radio screen goes to theprevious screen after approximately10 seconds once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse).

To cancel the delay, do one of thefollowing:. Press a hard key on the

infotainment system.. Shift into P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off, press the CAMbutton on the infotainment system.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited.



It does not display objects that areclose to either corner or under thebumper and can vary depending onvehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screen isdifferent from the actual distance.

The following illustration shows thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

1. View displayed by the camera.

1. View displayed by the camera.

2. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directly intothe camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked atyour dealer.

. There are extreme temperaturechanges.



FuelUse of the recommended fuel isan important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com. TOP TIERgasoline is only available in theU.S. and Canada.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑41.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.



See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑13. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesGasoline should contain detergentadditives that help prevent engineand fuel system deposits fromforming. Clean fuel injectors andintake valves will allow the emissioncontrol system to work properly.Some gasoline does not containsufficient quantities of additive tokeep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean. To make up for this lack ofdetergency, it is recommended thatGM Fuel System Treatment PLUS(GM Part No. 88861011) be addedto the fuel tank at every engine oilchange or every 15 000 km,whichever occurs first.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, maybe available in your area.However, fuels containing morethan 15% ethanol, such asE85 (85% ethanol), or morethan 15% MTBE (an ether) shouldnot be used in vehicles that werenot designed for those fuels.

See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13 formore information.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on theright rear side of the vehicle. Ifequipped, the fuel door is lockedwhen the vehicle doors are locked.Press K on the RKE to unlock.

To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.



Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑74.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑13.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑13.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Always:. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove container fromvehicle, trunk, or pickup bedbefore filling.

. Place container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.



Towing

General TowingInformationThe vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Some electricalequipment can damage thevehicle or cause components tonot work and would not becovered by the warranty. Alwayscheck with your dealer beforeadding electrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑36 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑36.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Manual TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-13Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-18Power Steering Fluid (1.4LL4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Power Steering Fluid (1.8LL4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-24Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-30

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-31Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39


10-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-42Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-60Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-67Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-67

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-71Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑36.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑15.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑36.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑16.

Notice: Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact thefluids, reservoir caps,or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handleinside the vehicle. It is locatedon the lower left side of theinstrument panel.


Vehicle Care 10-5

2. Go to the front of the vehicle andmove the secondary hoodrelease lever toward the rightside of the vehicle.

3. Lift the hood and release thehood prop from its retainer,above the radiator. Securelyplace the hood prop into the sloton the underside of the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall filler caps are on properly.Then, lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop.Remove the hood prop from theslot in the underside of the hoodand return the prop to itsretainer. The prop rod must clickinto place when returning it tothe retainer to prevent hooddamage.

2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)above the vehicle and release itso it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

1.4L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-7

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑13.

2. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10‑15.

4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

5. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10‑15.

6. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.See Brakes on page 10‑21 andHydraulic Clutch on page 10‑13.

7. Auxiliary Fuse Block. SeeEngine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑33.

8. Battery on page 10‑24.

9. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑21.

10. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑33.


10-8 Vehicle Care

1.8L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-9

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑13.

2. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid (1.4LL4 Engine) on page 10‑20 orPower Steering Fluid (1.8L L4Engine) on page 10‑20.

3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

4. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10‑15.

5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

6. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10‑15.

7. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.See Brakes on page 10‑21 andHydraulic Clutch on page 10‑13.

8. Auxiliary Fuse Block. SeeEngine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑33.

9. Battery on page 10‑24.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluidon page 10‑21.

11. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑33.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑11.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ WARNING

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping thetip down, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN mark onthe dipstick, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheckthe level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” in this section for anexplanation of what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the MAX mark, theengine could be damaged. You

should drain out the excess oil orlimit driving of the vehicle andseek a service professional toremove the excess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange between the MIN and MAXmarks. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark.


Vehicle Care 10-11

This certification mark indicates thatthe oil has been approved to thedexos1 specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be

used. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on

your skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change is


10-12 Vehicle Care

indicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A Code 82 (changeengine oil soon) DIC messagecomes on. See Vehicle Messageson page 5‑27. Change the oil assoon as possible within the next1 000 km (600mi). It is possible that,if driving under the best conditions,the oil life system might indicate thatan oil change is not necessary forup to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least oncea year and, at this time, the systemmust be reset. Your dealer hastrained service people who willperform this work and reset thesystem. It is also important to checkthe oil regularly over the course ofan oil drain interval and keep it atthe proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Press the MENU button to showRemaining Oil Life on thedisplay. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaininguseful life. If 99% is displayed,that means that 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

2. To reset the engine oil lifesystem, press the SET/CLRbutton while the oil life display isactive. After a few seconds,there will be a single chime andthe oil life will be reset to 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil is changed.It cannot be reset accurately.

If the Code 82 DIC message comesback on when the vehicle is started,the engine oil life system has notreset. Repeat the procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, you shouldhave this done at your dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3, and be sureto use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

Manual TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired assoon as possible.

Hydraulic ClutchFor vehicles with a manualtransmission, it is not necessary toregularly check brake/clutch fluidunless there is a leak suspected.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

When to Check and Whatto Use

The common hydraulic clutch andbrake master cylinder fluid reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

How to Check and Add Fluid

Visually check the brake/clutch fluidreservoir to make sure the fluid levelis at the MIN (minimum) line on theside of the reservoir. The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid system shouldbe closed and sealed.

Do not remove the cap to check thefluid level or to top‐off the fluid level.Remove the cap only whennecessary to add the proper fluiduntil the level reaches the MIN line.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter isin the engine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervals.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3. If you are driving industy/dirty conditions, inspect thefilter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from thevehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If thefilter remains covered with dirt, anew filter is required.


10-14 Vehicle Care

To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter:

1.4L L4 Engine

1.8L L4 Engine

1. Remove the two screws, tilt thecover, and slide it out of theassembly.

2. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

3. Lower the cover, slide it into theassembly, then secure with thetwo screws.

See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for replacement intervals.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

1.4L L4 Engine

1. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

1.8L L4 Engine

1. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX‐COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changingsooner, at the first maintenanceservice after each 30,000miles(50 000 km) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX‐COOL® (silicate‐free) coolantin the vehicle.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑18.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrong

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

mixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of cleandrinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If improper coolantmixture, inhibitors, or additivesare used in the vehicle coolingsystem, the engine couldoverheat and be damaged. Toomuch water in the mixture canfreeze and crack engine coolingparts. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Use onlythe proper mixture of enginecoolant for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment andyour health.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

It is normal to see coolant moving inthe upper coolant hose return linewhen the engine is running.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the markpointed to, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant.

Be sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

If no coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank, add coolant as follows:

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If no problem is found, check to seeif coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank. If coolant is visible butthe coolant level is not at theindicated level mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.


10-18 Vehicle Care

1.4L Engine Shown, 1.8L EngineSimilar

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop. Thiswill allow any pressure still left tobe vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture to the indicatedlevel mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches the indicatedlevel mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the coolant surgetank when the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is not at

the proper level, repeat Steps 1–3 and reinstall the pressure cap.If the coolant still is not at the properlevel when the system cools downagain, see your dealer.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof the engine overheating. SeeEngine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light on page 5‑19.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program(Canada) on page 13‑5 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑7.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan is running. If the engineis overheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine. Have the vehicleserviced.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Notice: Running the enginewithout coolant may causedamage or a fire. Vehicle damagewould not be covered by thewarranty.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

engine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) for anautomatic transmission orNeutral for a manualtransmission while stopped. If itis safe to do so, pull off the road,shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) foran automatic transmission orNeutral for a manualtransmission, and let theengine idle.

If the overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.


10-20 Vehicle Care

Power Steering Fluid(1.4L L4 Engine)The vehicle has electric powersteering and does not use powersteering fluid.

Power Steering Fluid(1.8L L4 Engine)

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for information on thelocation of the power steering fluidreservoir.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unless aleak is suspected in the system oran unusual noise is heard.

A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

Check the level after the vehicle hasbeen driven for at least 20 minutesso the fluid is warm.

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand let the engine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and pull itstraight up.

4. Wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

When the engine is hot, the levelshould be at the hot MAX level.When the engine is cold, the fluidlevel should be between MIN andMAX on the dipstick.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.


Vehicle Care 10-21

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When the vehicle needs windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake FluidThe brake/clutch master cylinderreservoir is filled with DOT 3 brakefluid as indicated on the reservoircap. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for the

location of the reservoir. The fluidlevel must be between the MIN andMAX marks.

There are only two reasons why thefluid level in the reservoir mightgo down:. The fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brake/clutchhydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brake/


Vehicle Care 10-23

clutch hydraulic system fixed,since a leak means that sooneror later the brakes will notwork well.

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake/clutch hydraulicsystem.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake/clutchhydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑16.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake/clutch hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake/clutch fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brake/clutchhydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately.


10-24 Vehicle Care

BatteryRefer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑68 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

Under normal driving conditions,transfer case fluid does not requirechanging or checking unless thereis a fluid leak or unusual noise.If required, have the transfer caseserviced by your dealer.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others couldbe injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑29.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.


Vehicle Care 10-25

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicleshould start only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑29.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removedin different ways. For proper typeand length, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑15.

Notice: Allowing the wiper arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the front wiper blades:

1. Lift the wiper arm from thewindshield until no furthermovement is possible.

2. Press the release button on thetop side of the wiper and pull thewiper blade out of the end of thewiper arm.


Vehicle Care 10-27

3. Install the wiper blade connectorby sliding into the end of thewiper arm until the button on thewiper blade clicks into place withthe wiper arm.

4. Place the wiper arm with thewiper blade in place back onthe windshield.

Notice: Damage may occur if thewiper blades are not in contactwith the windshield beforeturning on the wiper system.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

The rear wiper blade and wiper armhave a cover for protection. Thecover must be removed before thewiper blade can be replaced.

To remove the cover:

1. Slide a plastic tool under thecover and push upward tounsnap.

2. Slide the cover toward the wiperblade tip to unhook it from theblade assembly.

3. Remove the cover.

4. After wiper blade replacement,ensure that the cover hookslides into the slot in the bladeassembly.

5. Snap the cover down to secure.

To replace the wiper blade:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.

4. Replace the wiper cover.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑32.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps


1. Low-Beam Headlamp

2. Turn Signal Lamp

3. High-Beam Headlamp

4. Parking Lamp


Vehicle Care 10-29

High-Beam Headlamp/Low-Beam Headlamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

2. Remove the headlamp bulbaccess cover.

3. Turn the bulb counterclockwiseand pull straight back.

4. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the bulb.

5. Install the new bulb in theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.

6. Reconnect the wiring harnessconnector.

7. Install the headlamp bulb accesscover.

Parking Lamp


2. Remove the parking lamp bulbsocket from the headlampassembly by turningcounterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from the bulbsocket by pulling it straight out.

4. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

5. Install the bulb socket into theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.


10-30 Vehicle Care

Turn Signal Lamp


2. Remove the turn signal lampbulb socket from the headlampassembly by turningcounterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from the bulbsocket by pulling it straight out.

4. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

5. Install the bulb socket into theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

1. Sidemarker Lamp

2. Stoplamp/Taillamp

3. Taillamp

4. Back-up Lamp

5. Turn Signal Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the two screws, whichsecure the taillamp assembly.

3. Remove the taillamp assemblyby pulling it straight back untilthe two posts disengage fromthe grommets. Do not pull on thewiring harness.


Vehicle Care 10-31

4. Remove the bulb socket fromthe taillamp assembly by turningit counterclockwise.

5. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out.

6. Install a new bulb into the bulbsocket.

7. Install the bulb socket into thetaillamp assembly by turning itclockwise.

8. Install the taillamp assembly andtighten the two screws.

License Plate Lamp

Lamp Assembly

Bulb Assembly

1. Bulb Socket

2. Bulb

3. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the left end of the lampassembly toward the right.

2. Turn the lamp assembly down toremove it.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Turn the lamp assembly into thelamp assembly openingengaging the clip side first.

7. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.


10-32 Vehicle Care

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 921

Front Parking Lamp 7444NA

Front TurnSignal Lamp

7444NA

High-BeamHeadlamp

9005LL

License Plate Lamp W5W LL

Low-BeamHeadlamp

H11 LL

RearSidemarker Lamp

W5W LL

Rear TurnSignal Lamp

7443NA

Stoplamp/Taillamp 7443 LL

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed.This greatly reduces the chance ofcircuit overload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before usingthe windshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑33 and Instrument PanelFuse Block on page 10‑36.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,squeeze the clip and lift it up.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.


10-34 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

1 Sunroof

2 Outside RearviewMirror Switch

3 Canister VentSolenoid (1.4L Only)

4 Not Used

5 Electronic BrakeControl ModuleValve

6 Not Used

7 Not Used

8 TransmissionControl ModuleBattery

9 Not Used

10 Fuel SystemControl ModuleR/C (1.4L Only)/Headlamp Leveling

11 Rear Wiper

Mini Fuses Usage

12 Rear WindowDefogger

13 Not Used

14 Outside RearviewMirror Heater

15 Fuel System ControlModule Battery(1.4L Only)

16 Heated Seat Module

17 TransmissionControl Module R/C

18 Engine ControlModule R/C

19 Fuel Pump(1.8L Only)

20 Not Used

21 Fan Relay (AuxiliaryFuse Block – 1.4L)/Fan 3 Relay85 (1.8L)

22 Cold Start Pump(1.8L Only)

Mini Fuses Usage

23 Ignition Coil/Injectors

24 Washer Pump

25 Not Used

26 Canister PurgeSolenoid/WaterValve Solenoid/Oxygen Sensors –Pre and Post/Turbo WastegateSolenoid (1.4L)/Turbo BypassSolenoid (1.4L)/IMTVSolenoid (1.8L)

27 Not Used

28 Not Used

29 Engine ControlModule PowertrainIgnition 1/Ignition 2

30 Mass Air FlowSensor

31 Left High-BeamHeadlamp


Vehicle Care 10-35

Mini Fuses Usage

32 Right High-BeamHeadlamp

33 Engine ControlModule Battery

34 Horn

35 Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

36 Front Fog Lamps

J-CaseFuses

Usage

1 Electronic BrakeControlModule Pump

2 Front Wiper

3 Blower Motor

4 IEC R/C

5 Not Used

6 Not Used

J-CaseFuses

Usage

7 Not Used

8 Cooling Fan Low/Mid (1.4L)/CoolingFan Low (1.8L)

9 Cooling Fan High

10 EVP

11 Starter Solenoid

U-MicroRelays

Usage

2 Fuel Pump(1.8L Only)

4 Spare

HC-MicroRelays

Usage

7 Starter

MiniRelays

Usage

1 Run Crank

3 Cooling Fan Mid(1.4L Only)

5 Powertrain Relay

8 Cooling Fan Low

HC-MiniRelays

Usage

6 Cooling Fan High


10-36 Vehicle Care

Auxiliary Fuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,squeeze the clips and lift it up.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


Relays Usage

01 ElectricVacuum Pump

02 Cooling FanControl 1

03 Cooling FanControl 2

04 Trailer (1.4L Only)

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block ison the underside of the driver sideinstrument panel. To access thefuses, remove the storagecompartment. To remove thestorage compartment, open thecompartment and pull it out.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Instrument Panel Fuse Block


Mini Fuses Usage

1 Body ControlModule 1








9 Discrete LogicIgnition Sensor

10 Sensing DiagnosticModule Battery

11 Data LinkConnection

Mini Fuses Usage

12 Heater, Ventilation,and Air ConditioningMDL/ICS

13 Liftgate Relay

14 UPA Module

15 LDW Module/InsideRearview Mirror

16 Adaptive ForwardLighting Module

17 PowerWNDWSW DR

18 Rain Sensor

19 Body ControlModule RegulatedVoltage Control

20 Steering WheelSwitch Backlighting

21 A/C AccessoryPower Outlet/PRNDL


10-38 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

22 Cigar Lighter/DCAccessory PowerOutlet

23 Spare

24 Spare

25 Spare

26 Sensing DiagnosticModule RC/Automatic OccupantSensing Display

27 IPC/CompassModule

28 Headlamp Switch//DC Converter/ClutchSwitch

29 Spare

30 Spare

Mini Fuses Usage

31 IPC Battery

32 Radio/Chime

33 Display

34 OnStar/VLBS

S/B Fuses Usage

1 PTC 1

2 PTC 2

3 Power WindowMotor Front

4 Power WindowMotor Rear

5 Logistic Mode Relay

6 Spare

7 Spare

8 Spare

CircuitBreaker

Usage

CB1 Spare

Midi Fuse Usage

M01 PTC

Relays Usage

01 Accessory/RetainedAccessory Power

02 Liftgate

03 Spare

04 Blower Relay

05 Logistic Mode


Vehicle Care 10-39

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block isbehind a cover on the left side ofthe rear compartment. To accessthe fuses, remove the cover.


Mini Fuses Usage

1 Driver Seat PowerLumbar Switch

2 Passenger SeatPower LumbarSwitch

3 Amplifier

4 Trailer Socket

5 All-Wheel DriveModule

6 Automatic OccupantSensing Module

7 Spare

8 Trailer ParkingLamps

9 Spare

10 Spare

11 Trailer Module

12 Nav Dock

13 Heated SteeringWheel


10-40 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

14 Trailer Socket

15 EVP Switch

16 Water In FuelSensor

17 Inside RearviewMirror/RegulatedVoltage Control

18 Spare

S/B Fuses Usage

1 Driver Power SeatSwitch/MemoryModule

2 Passenger PowerSeat Switch

3 Trailer Module

S/B Fuses Usage

4 A/C-D/C Inverter

5 Battery

6 Headlamp Washer

7 Spare

8 Spare

9 Spare

Relays Usage

1 Ignition Relay

2 Run Relay

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer.See the warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-41

WARNING (Continued)

There could be a blowout anda serious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact— such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued). Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10‑42.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not, originally,equipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on snow or ice-coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10‑56.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special treadand compound will decreaseperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. We recommendinstalling winter tires on the vehicleif frequent driving in coldtemperatures or on snow or icecovered roads is expected. SeeWinter Tires on page 10‑42.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,


Vehicle Care 10-43

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first two

digits represent the week (01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on three

performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑58.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.


10-44 Vehicle Care

(2) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire on page 10‑67 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 10‑61.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(5) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48.

(6) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger


Vehicle Care 10-45

vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, power

steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)


10-46 Vehicle Care

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑48.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:A tire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.


Vehicle Care 10-47

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard.

See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across thetread of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑55.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑58.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget to check thespare tire. If the vehicle has acompact spare tire, it should be


Vehicle Care 10-49

at 420 kPa (60 psi). SeeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑67 and Full-Size SpareTire on page 10‑67 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.

If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.


10-50 Vehicle Care

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicatoris illuminated, the system may notbe able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always checkthe TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensurethat the replacement or alternatetires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑50.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement(Canada) on page 13‑18 forinformation regarding Part 15 ofthe Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and withIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate the


Vehicle Care 10-51

tires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire may display in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Thelow tire pressure warning light andthe DIC warning message,if equipped, come on at eachignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, it may bepossible to view the tire pressurelevels. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑24.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑48.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition, but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑53, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑54, and Tires onpage 10‑40.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning light,defined above, flashes for aboutone minute and then stays on forthe remainder of the ignition cycle.A DIC warning message may alsodisplay. The malfunction light andDIC warning message, if equipped,come on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause theseto come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC message,if equipped, should go off afterthe road tire is replaced and thesensor matching process isperformed successfully. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.


10-52 Vehicle Care

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage, if equipped, should gooff after successfully completingthe sensor matching process.See "TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage, if equipped, should gooff when the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑56.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message, if equipped,come on and stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage, if equipped, should go offat the next ignition cycle. Thesensors are matched to the tire/

wheel positions, using a TPMSrelearn tool, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire,and driver side rear. See yourdealer for service or to purchase arelearn tool.

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information Menu(Menu 2) in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

4. Use the thumbwheel (or up anddown arrows) to scroll to the TirePressure Menu Item screen.


Vehicle Care 10-53

5. Press and hold the SET/CLRbutton to begin the sensormatching process.

A message requestingacceptance of the process maydisplay.

6. If requested, press the SET/CLRbutton again to confirm theselection.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARN or TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

10. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARN orTIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage on the DIC displayscreen goes off.

12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.


10-54 Vehicle Care

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment.

See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑55 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑60.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated.

See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑50.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-55

WARNING (Continued)

towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time forNew TiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑53 and TireRotation on page 10‑54.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced aftersix years, regardless of tread wear.The tire manufacturer date is thelast four digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01–52) andthe last two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating.

When replacement tires areneeded, GM stronglyrecommends buying tires withthe same TPC Spec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑42.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.

Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10‑54 forinformation on proper tirerotation. However, if it isnecessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertire's maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.


Vehicle Care 10-57

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑49.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.


10-58 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑56 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured under

controlled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead

to sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancing


10-60 Vehicle Care

will not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicle

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-61

WARNING (Continued)

parts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions.To avoid vehicle damage, driveslow and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used,install them on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10‑40. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only for

(Continued)


10-62 Vehicle Care

WARNING (Continued)

changing a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

To help prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1).

1. Wheel Block

2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The spare tire and tools are locatedin the storage compartment in therear of the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-63

1. Wrench

2. Jack

3. Strap

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2‑8.

2. Lift the trim cover.

3. Turn the retainercounterclockwise to remove it.

4. Remove the spare tire, jack, andtools and place them near thetire being changed.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑61.

2. Remove the wheel cover, if thevehicle has one, to reach thewheel bolts.

3. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen thewheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.


10-64 Vehicle Care

4. Place the jack at the positionmarked with a half circle.

5. Place the hex tube end of thewrench over the hex head of thejack to attach it.

6. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise until the lift head isfirmly contacting the properlifting point nearest the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To help

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.


Vehicle Care 10-65

7. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle farenough off the ground so thereis enough room for the spare tireto fit underneath the wheel well.

8. Turn the wheel nutscounterclockwise toremove them.

9. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

11. Place the spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

12. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Turneach nut clockwise, by hand,until the wheel is held againstthe hub.

13. Lower the vehicle by turningthe wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench in acrisscross sequence, asshown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

1. Return the jack and tools to theiroriginal storage location.

2. Replace the trim cover.

3. Place the flat tire, lying flat, inthe rear storage compartment.

4. Attach one end of the strap to acargo tie-down in the rear of thevehicle.

5. Route the strap through thewheel, as shown.

6. Attach the other end of the strapto the other cargo tie-down inthe rear of the vehicle.

7. Tighten the strap.

Storing the Compact Spare Tireand Tools

Reverse the instructions forremoving the spare tire and tools tostore the spare tire.


Vehicle Care 10-67

The compact spare tire is fortemporary use only. Replace thecompact spare tire with a full-sizetire as soon as you can. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 10‑67.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h(50 mph). To conserve the tread ofthe spare tire, have the standard tirerepaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel, and other parts ofthe vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and thechains. Do not use tire chains onthe compact spare.

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48 and Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10 for informationregarding proper tire inflation andloading the vehicle. For instructionson how to remove, install, or store aspare tire, see Tire Changing onpage 10‑62.


10-68 Vehicle Care

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare is correctlyinflated. The spare tire is made toperform well at speeds up to112 km/h (70 mph) at therecommended inflation pressure, soyou can finish your trip.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep the spare tire and its wheeltogether.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑24.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1.4L L4 Engine Shown, 1.8L L4Engine Similar

1. Discharged Battery NegativeGrounding Point

2. Discharged Battery PositiveTerminal


Vehicle Care 10-69

3. Good Battery Negative Terminal

4. Good Battery Positive Terminal

The jump start negative groundingpoint (1) for the discharged batteryis the engine block or an enginemounting bolt. Connect to a spot asfar away from the dischargedbattery as possible.

The jump start positive terminal onthe discharged battery (2) is locatedin the engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle.

The jump start positive terminal (3)and negative terminal (4) are on thebattery of the vehicle providing thejump start.

The positive jump start connectionfor the discharged battery is under atrim cover. Open the cover toexpose the terminal.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump

starting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.

3. Set the parking brake firmly andput the shift lever in P (Park)with an automatic transmission,or Neutral with a manualtransmission. See Shifting IntoPark on page 9‑18 with anautomatic transmission,or Parking on page 9‑21 with amanual transmission.

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.Turn off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

(Continued)


10-70 Vehicle Care

WARNING (Continued)

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of thered positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal on thedischarged battery.

6. Connect the other end of thered positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery.

7. Connect one end of theblack negative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of the goodbattery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to thenegative (–) grounding point forthe discharged battery.

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse sequence exactly whenremoving jumper cables.


Vehicle Care 10-71

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: Incorrectly towing adisabled vehicle may causedamage. The damage would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier or a wheel lift tow truck.If a wheel lift tow truck is used, thedrive wheels cannot contact theroad while the vehicle is beingtowed. A wheel dolly must be usedto lift all drive wheels off the ground.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

Notice: A tow eye may be used tomove a disabled vehicle if theproper equipment is used. Usecaution and low speeds toprevent damage to the vehicle.

If equipped, carefully open the coverby using the small notch thatconceals the tow eye socket.

Install the tow eye into the socket byturning it clockwise until it stops.When the tow eye is removed,reinstall the cover with the notch inthe original position.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle towingare known as dinghy towing anddolly towing. Dinghy towing istowing the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground. Dolly towingis towing the vehicle with twowheels on the ground and twowheels up on a device known as adolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.


10-72 Vehicle Care

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

The vehicle was not designed to betowed with all four wheels on theground.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-DriveVehicles)

All-wheel-drive vehicles must not betowed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground.


Vehicle Care 10-73

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel-DriveVehicles Only)

To tow a front-wheel-drive vehiclefrom the front with two wheels onthe ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed fortowing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not usepetroleum-based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents asthey can damage the vehicle'spaint, metal, or plastic parts.If damage occurs, it would not becovered by the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid usinghigh-pressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washers

exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.

If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to a high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses andemblems. Follow instructions under"Washing the Vehicle" in thissection.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstripsonce a year. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with a

clean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑13.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,


10-76 Vehicle Care

calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect the front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,

leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visuallycheck constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion

material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.


Vehicle Care 10-77

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners to

remain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.78 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasive


10-78 Vehicle Care

cleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Notice: Cleaning the windshieldwith water during the first three tosix months of ownership willreduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

Notice: Do not attach a devicewith a suction cup to the display.This may cause damage andwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters, or spot removers.Do not use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor matsbe purchased.

Non-GM floor mats may not fitproperly and may interfere withthe accelerator or brake pedal.Always check that the floor matsdo not interfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by a button-type retainer.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

1. Pull up on the rear of the floormat to unlock the retainers andremove.

2. Reinstall by lining up the floormat retainer openings over thecarpet retainers and snap intoposition.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.


10-82 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They have up‐to‐date tools and equipment for fastand accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.

Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.The Additional Required Services ‐Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑40.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services ‐Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.



{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑9.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑53.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑21.

Engine Oil Change

When the Code 82 DIC messagedisplays, have the engine oil andfilter changed within the next1 000 km/600 mi. If driven under thebest conditions, the engine oil lifesystem might not indicate the needfor vehicle service for more than ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand the oil life system must bereset. Your trained dealer techniciancan perform this work. If the engineoil life system is reset accidentally,service the vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the last service.Reset the oil life system when theoil is changed. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10‑11.



Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑54.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑9 and Engine OilLife System on page 10‑11.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑16.

. Check engine cooling systemhoses and connections.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑21.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑74. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑26.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑48.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑53.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑13.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑74.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑20.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑74.



. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑24.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑25.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑25.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑26.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2‑16.



Additional Required Services

Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Change automatic transmission fluid. Changefilter if serviceable. @

Drain, flush, and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake/clutch fluid. (6) @

Replace timing belt or timing chain. (6) @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve works properly,if the vehicle has one. Replace asneeded.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑15.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid. Changefilter if serviceable. @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain, flush, and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake/clutch fluid. (6) @

Replace timing belt or timing chain. (6) @

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if the

vehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve works properly,if the vehicle has one. Replace asneeded.



(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑15.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommendedthat your dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealertechnicians know your vehicle best.Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti‐point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the services andconditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.



Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break‐down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion‐free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the belts andrecommend replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi‐point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi‐point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.



Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi‐pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑77 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑74.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.



Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑9.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.

Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, inCanada 88863462).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, inCanada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 95021102 —

Engine Oil Filter 93185674 PF2257G

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 13271190 CF181

Spark Plugs

1.4L L4 55585517 —

1.8L L4 55565219 —

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 65.0 cm (25.6 in) 95915125 —

Passenger Side – 38.0 cm (15.0 in) 95915127 —

Rear – 26.5 cm (10.4 in) 95915137 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

1.4L L4 6.5 L 6.9 qt

1.8L L4 6.6 L 7.0 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

1.4L L4 4.0 L 4.2 qt

1.8L L4 4.5 L 4.8 qt

Fuel Tank 53 L 14 gal

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

1.4L L4 B Automatic and Manual 0.7 mm (0.028 in)

1.8L L4 5 Automatic and Manual 0.9 mm (0.035 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

1.4L L4 Engine

1.8L L4 Engine (with AirConditioning)

1.8L L4 Engine (without AirConditioning)


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance Offices(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside Assistance Program(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (Canada) . . . 13-11

Courtesy TransportationProgram (Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-11

Collision Damage Repair(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-15

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-17OnStar® (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . 13-18Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18

Radio Frequency Statement(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Canada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Carerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE: In the event thatyou do not feel your concerns havebeen addressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days.

We believe our impartial programoffers advantages over courts inmost jurisdictions because it isinformal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).



Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.

Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of thevehicle must be handled by yourdealer sales or service departments.However, we recognize that despite

the good intentions of all partiesinvolved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to your dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or yourdealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number. Model year. Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Mileage. Delivery date. Description of the problem. Dealership name. Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(Canada) on page 13‑4 or CustomerAssistance Offices (Mexico) onpage 13‑4.



Customer AssistanceOffices (Canada)Chevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].

Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0811

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0811

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8190

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (Canada)To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerCare Center. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Chevrolet bydialing: 1-800-263-3830.



Online Owner Center(Canada)

Chevrolet Owner Centre(chevroletowner.ca)

Take a trip to the Chevrolet OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program(Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on this offer,call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483).TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Canada)Call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.



Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

A person driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner's

responsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Additional Service Details. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.



. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost for

parts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)As a new owner, your vehicle isautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.The services are available at nocost under the terms and conditionsof the program. The RoadsideAssistance program is not part of,or included, in the coverageprovided by the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Roadside Assistance providesassistance to the driver andpassengers while driving the vehiclewithin your city of residence or onany passable road in Mexico, theUnited States, and Canada.Services are subject to thelimitations described in the followingpages. Program coverage varies bycountry.

Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

This program expires two yearsfrom the date of the invoice for thevehicle, regardless of vehiclemileage and changes in vehicleownership.

For more information about therenewal of this program at the endof its term, contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center at01-800-466-0800.

Services Provided. Flat Tire Change: If unable to

change a flat tire, RoadsideAssistance will provide towingservice to the nearest authorizedChevrolet dealership. It is theowner's responsibility for therepair or replacement of the tire.This service is limited to thetransfer of the vehicle to therepair facility.



. Emergency Fuel Delivery:Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. *Emergency Messages:Transmission of urgent phonemessages.

. *Emergency Calls: Call foremergency services.

. *Dealership LocationAssistance: Informationregarding addresses andtelephone numbers for Chevroletdealers.

. Emergency Towing: Tow to thenearest dealer for warrantyservice if the vehicle cannot bedriven.

If the vehicle is involved in anaccident during the commissionof a crime, administrativeviolation, or breach of trafficregulations, RoadsideAssistance will not provideservice. When the vehicle isnot accessible to be towed, allmaneuvers required to access itwill be at the owner's expense.

If the vehicle is in another cityoutside of your residence,Roadside Assistance is limitedto moving the vehicle to thenearest dealer. If you would likethe vehicle moved to a differentdealer, you will be asked tocover the difference in cost atthe time of the move.

If the vehicle cannot be receivedby the nearest Chevrolet dealerdue to scheduling conflicts, thevehicle will be taken to a safeplace where it will remain for upto 48 hours until it can be takento the dealer. If the storage costsexceed the amount authorized,the owner is responsible to paythe difference at the time ofservice. Contact RoadsideAssistance for more informationon authorized amounts.



. *Trip Interruption: This serviceis provided if you are preventedfrom further usage of yourvehicle while traveling and it isnot possible for the nearestChevrolet dealership to repairthe vehicle the same day,requiring the vehicle to stay atthe dealership for a night ormore. If this happens, in additionto the previously listed servicesand prior to confirmation by thedealership, you are entitled tochoose one of the followingalternatives, within the limits ofexisting Roadside Assistanceprogram guidelines. If the costsexceed the amount authorizedfor these services, you must paythe difference at the time ofservice.

Roadside Assistance willcoordinate hotelaccommodations for all vehicletravelers for up to two nights.

A rental car will be provided forup to two days and the vehiclemust be returned to its originaldestination, excluding vehicleswith a carrying capacity greaterthan 3.5 tons.

Complimentary Transportation:If you prefer to continue your tripto the intended destination orreturn to your place ofresidence, and the trip requiresmore than eight hours driving onthe road, transportation for thedriver and passengers by firstclass bus or coach commercialairline will be provided to alocation chosen by RoadsideAssistance, depending onavailability at the chosendestination. Restrictions applybased on vehicle specifications.

If you are on the road, taxiservice to the nearest busstation or airport will beprovided.

. *ComplimentaryTransportation for VehiclePick Up: Transportation to pickup your vehicle after repairs arecomplete. Once the dealer hasreported that the vehicle hasbeen repaired, RoadsideAssistance will provide bus orcommercial airline one-wayservice (subject to availability)for the person designated by youto collect your vehicle at thedealership's location if you or thedesignated person are not in thesame town or city as thedealership.

*These services are not providedfor U.S. or Canada residents.All services provided in the U.S. andCanada are at the owner's expenseand will be reimbursed by RoadsideAssistance.



Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance

Roadside Assistance does notcover or reimburse services for thefollowing:. Events caused by fraud or bad

faith by the driver.. Vehicle immobilization situations

due to a major force orunforeseen circumstances,such as natural phenomena ofan extraordinary nature,earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,and other cyclonic storms.

. Vehicle immobilization situationsarising from car accidentscaused by the driver of thevehicle or third parties. Thismeans any occurrence thatcauses physical injury to theoccupants and/or the vehiclecaused by external forces.

. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,armed forces or police actionswhich prevent timely delivery ofassistance services.

. Food service, beverages,telephone calls, or other extracosts. Accommodation costsapply only to Mexico per theterms and conditions of theRoadside Assistance program.

. Any damage to the vehiclewithout intent, derived from theservices provided.

. Cost of towing a trailer whenchoosing a Chevrolet dealer thatis nearest to the temporarystorage facility for the disabledvehicle.

. Cost of all maneuvers requiredto access the vehicle when it isnot available to be towed.

. Cost of fuel provided.

Routine vehicle repair costs arenot covered by the RoadsideAssistance program. For moreinformation, see your new vehiclewarranty.

Contacting Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance services are ofno cost to you and available24 hours a day, 365 days a year.Costs are only incurred in situationsthat exceed the limits of theprogram, some of which are listedpreviously in this section.

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0800

United States

1-866-466-8901

Canada

1-800-268-6800

E-mail

[email protected]

Chevrolet reserves the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.



Scheduling ServiceAppointments (Canada)When the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgram (Canada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported by



original receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,

insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair(Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.



Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequent

collisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.

Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.



If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program(Canada) on page 13‑5 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑7.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑30.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that any

required replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.



In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The Owner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted inU.S. funds. Make checks payablein U.S. funds.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited.Call Transport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet CustomerAssistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.



OnStar® (Canada)If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation; aboutcollisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to theOnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatement (Canada)This vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PushQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Push= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.


14-2 OnStar

Push the OnStar Emergencybutton> to get a priorityconnection to an EmergencyAdvisor available 24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in most crashes,even if help cannot be requested.

Push> to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations before firstresponders arrive.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped with theseservices. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if it is

equipped with automatic door locks,and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PushQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from Google Maps™or MapQuest.com. The OnStarmapping database is continuouslyupdated. Visit www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded tothe vehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Push=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. Push=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with addressand the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations from GoogleMaps and MapQuest.com to theirTurn-by-Turn Navigation orscreen-based navigation system.When ready, the directions will bedownloaded to the vehicle.

Destination Download: PushQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, push the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps visitwww.onstar.com.


14-4 OnStar

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled from a cell phone throughthe OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.See www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Hands-Free Calling

1. Push=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press=. The system responds“OnStar Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” The system responds“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing. Thesystem responds “911.”

4. Say “Call.” The system responds“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Push=. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to tryagain. System responds: “OK,storing <name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”


OnStar 14-5

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Push= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

OnStar Mobile App

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to your iPhone, Android,or BlackBerry smartphone to checkvehicle fuel level, oil life, or tirepressure; to start the vehicle(if equipped) or unlock it; or toconnect to an OnStar Advisor. ForOnStar RemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com.

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If adiagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, pushQ, and anAdvisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PushQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PushQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.


14-6 OnStar

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);contact OnStar at 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY1-877-248-2080; or pushQ tospeak with an Advisor. OnStarservices require a vehicle electricalsystem, wireless service, and GPSsatellite technologies to be availableand operating for features tofunction properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyond thecontrol of OnStar may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement(Canada) on page 13‑18 forinformation regarding Part 15 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules andIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PushQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.


OnStar 14-7

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle.The available dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar.com

The website provides access toaccount information, manages theOnStar subscription, and allowsviewing of videos of each service.Get subscription plan pricing andsign up for OnStar VehicleDiagnostics. Click on the “MyAccount” tab on the home page.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Themanufacturer of the vehiclefurnishes detailed warrantyinformation.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmedto respond in French or Spanish.PushQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors can speak French orSpanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.


14-8 OnStar

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PushQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑44. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitiveusers of wireless communicationsare cautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellularcommunications cannot be assured.

Third parties may unlawfullyintercept or access transmissionsand private communications withoutconsent.

OnStar - libcurl and unzipacknowledgments

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software. Beloware the notices and licensesassociated with this software:

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010,Daniel Stenberg,<[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.


OnStar 14-9

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license.The definitive version of thisdocument should be availableat ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP.All rights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley,Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,

Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.


14-10 OnStar

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binaryor disabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including, butnot limited to, labeling of thealtered versions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but not limitedto, different capitalizations),“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or“MacZip” without the explicitpermission of Info-ZIP.Such altered versions arefurther prohibited frommisrepresentative use of theZip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right touse the names “Info-ZIP,”“Zip,” “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,”“WiZ,” “Pocket UnZip,” “PocketZip,” and “MacZip” for its ownsource and binary releases.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-13Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Where Are theAirbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26, 3-27

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

System Check . . . . . . . . . .3-22, 3-24AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-24, 9-27AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

ArmrestFront Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5, 13-7

AudioBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18

Audio SystemFixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-18Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-26Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-28, 7-30, 7-39Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-16

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Bulb Replacement (cont'd)Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-31Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-30

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-40Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

CargoManagement System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-25

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-45

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51, 3-53Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77


INDEX i-3

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-12Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-15

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-12Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-17Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Descent ControlSystem (DCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Descent Control SystemLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24

DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-24, 9-27

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

DrivingDefensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-20Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7


i-4 INDEX

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Engine (cont'd)Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-22Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-22Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-17Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-12Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Fog LampsFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-40Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-21Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40Requirements, California . . . . .9-40

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-67


INDEX i-5

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

GaugesFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . .5-22

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-23

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-29Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9


i-6 INDEX

Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-42LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Lamps (cont'd)Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-13On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7LightingIllumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Descent Control System . . . . . .5-17Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Lights (cont'd)Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-19

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-22Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-16StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Ultrasonic Parking Sensor . . . .5-18Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-18

LinkSmartphone . . . . . . 7-47, 7-49, 7-51


INDEX i-7

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-21Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-13Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

MessagesVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52, 7-57, 7-59Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-38Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-5OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-15

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-18


i-8 INDEX

Overview,InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-5, 7-7

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-21Ultrasonic Sensor Light . . . . . . .5-18

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-32Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-28, 7-30, 7-39Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45

Pictures andMovies . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52, 7-57, 7-59

PortUSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-22Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-18Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Power Steering WarningLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-18Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-37Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16


INDEX i-9

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Reduced Engine PowerLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-37Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-21

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-16General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5, 13-7

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-21Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-20

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-16General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-11SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-5Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51, 3-53

SecurityOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9


i-10 INDEX

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Scheduling Appointments . . . .13-11Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

SmartphoneLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47, 7-49, 7-51

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-24Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-18Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Storage AreasCargo Management System . . . 4-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Underseat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-61


INDEX i-11

Tires (cont'd)Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-50Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-49Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-60When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42TowingGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . .9-44Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-71Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-30Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Triangle, Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-36Ultrasonic Parking SensorLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15


i-12 INDEX

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warning Triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-44Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-26WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Documents

2013 Trax Manual